Nextream - 4110-20

May 2020
PDF

This document was uploaded by user and they confirmed that they have the permission to share it. If you are author or own the copyright of this book, please report to us by using this DMCA report form. Report DMCA

Overview

Download & View Nextream - 4110-20 as PDF for free.

More details

Words: 68,913
Pages: 474

Preview
Full text

Head Office 17, rue du Petit Albi BP 8244 95801 Cergy Pontoise Cedex FRANCE

tel +33 1 34 20 70 00 fax +33 1 34 20 70 47 http://www.nextream-online.com

DBE 4110 DSNG ENCODER (Release 7.0) MPEG-2/DVB Encoder

USER MANUAL 47232437AK

This document and any updates and/or supplemental information, including any copies thereof, cannot be reproduced, neither communicated to a third party, without written authorisation from NEXTREAM.

© 2003 NEXTREAM All rights reserved

BLANK PAGE

GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

iii

GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Please review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it. CAUTION: These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only. To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not perform any servicing other than that contained in the Operating Instructions unless you are qualified to do so. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

Important Safety Precautions Use Proper Power Cord

Power cords are no longer shipped with the device. You are recommended to use the cord described on page 55.

Avoid Electric Overload

Do not apply a mains voltage that is outside the range specified in this manual.

Ground the Product

This product is grounded through the power cord. To avoid electric shock, the ground pin must be correctly connected to the ground. Before switching the device on, ensure that it is properly grounded.

Do Not Operate Without Covers

To avoid electric shock or fire hazard, do not operate this product with cover panels or plates removed.

Use Proper Fuse

For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only with same type and rating of fuse specified by NEXTREAM.

Do Not Operate in Wet/Damp Conditions

To avoid electric shock, do not operate this product in wet or damp conditions.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

iv

GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Do Not Operate in Explosive Atmosphere

To avoid injury or fire hazard, do not operate this product in an explosive atmosphere.

Maintenance

To avoid electric shock, disconnect the mains power supply before carrying out any maintenance operations on the device. Maintenance should be carried out by qualified personnel.

Product Damage Precautions Use Proper Power Source Fitting

Dusty atmosphere

Do not operate this product from a power source that applies more than the voltage specified. If installing the device in a rack, observe the installation instructions in the section Rack installation page 53. Do not just secure the front panel of the device in the rack, instead use Lprofiles as specified in the above-mentioned section. As the device features no air filter, it must be installed in a rack fitted with a filter if used in a dusty environment. This filter should be cleaned on a regular basis to avoid any overheating.

Provide Proper Ventilation

Provide proper ventilation to prevent product overheating.

Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures

If you suspect there is damage to this product, have it inspected by qualified service personnel.

Replacing components

Only use components from or approved by NEXTREAM.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

v

Replacement of RAM with in-built lithium battery

This product includes a non volatile RAM with an in-built lithium battery which should never require replacing. If for any reason replacement does prove necessary, please observe the following conditions: . The operation must only be performed by qualified personnel. . Only replace with the same or equivalent memory type. CAUTION! Danger of explosion if memory is incorrectly replaced. . Ensure the memory is inserted the right way round. . Please dispose of dead memories according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

Retain Original Packaging

If equipment is returned to the Customer Service Department, the faulty device must be packed where possible in its original packaging (protective corners and boxes). If you no longer have the packaging, the faulty device must be protected against shocks during transportation. Our Customer Service Department examines packaging on arrival and can refuse to carry out repairs if the packaging has been visibly damaged during transportation and this has led to further damage in addition to the fault originally noted. Transportation costs and risks for equipment returns are borne by the Customer. Equipment should only be returned with a return authorisation form (provided at the end of this manual).

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

vi

GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

BLANK PAGE

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

USING THE MANUAL

vii

USING THE MANUAL

Chapter 1 "Specifications" provides technical specifications and detailed characteristics of the DBE 4110 DSNG Encoder.

Chapter 2 "Installation" explains the operations necessary on initial start up: equipment installation, connection, switching on, installation of "Stand-alone" supervision software for operation from a dedicated PC and installation of boards.

Chapter 3 "Front Panel Operation" presents the local supervision and configuration mode which gives the DSNG operator full control of signal transmission and compression parameters.

Chapter 4 "PC operation - Control & Command software" gives a description of the "Stand-alone" software.

Chapter 5 "PC operation - Fast_DSNG software" gives a description of the "Fast_DSNG" software especially designed for DSNG operators.

Chapter 6 "Troubleshooting" gives useful basic maintenance information which will assist with connection problems and mains fuse inspection.

Chapter 7 "Customer Service" contains important contact information should you require the services of the NEXTREAM Customer Service.

Chapter 8 "Abbreviations and Acroynms" contains a list of the principal abbreviations and acronyms used in the manual along with their wording in full.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

viii

USING THE MANUAL

BLANK PAGE

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

CONTENTS

ix

Contents General Safety Instructions ................................................................................iii Using the manual ................................................................................................vii

CHAPTER 1 SPECIFICATIONS 1.1 - Encoding system overview .............................................................................. 3 1.2 - DBE 4110 overview............................................................................................ 4 1.3 - Sales references ................................................................................................ 6 1.4 - Specifications .................................................................................................... 8 1.4.1 - Description of basic functions...................................................................... 8 1.4.1.1 - Video audio interface (SDI) .............................................................. 8 1.4.1.2 - De-embedded audio inputs .............................................................. 8 1.4.1.3 - Analogue audio inputs with 2 stereo audio ...................................... 9 1.4.1.4 - TS output ......................................................................................... 9 1.4.1.5 - Control and command interface ..................................................... 10 1.4.1.6 - MPEG-2 4:2:0MP@ML .................................................................. 12 1.4.1.7 - Audio encoder ................................................................................ 13 1.4.1.8 - SI/PSI management ....................................................................... 14 1.4.1.9 - Low delay mode ............................................................................. 14 1.4.1.10 - Private data .................................................................................. 15 1.4.1.11 - Stream Editing ............................................................................. 17 1.4.1.12 - VBI processing ............................................................................. 18 1.4.1.13 - COMPIN board ............................................................................ 23 1.4.2 - Description of optional functions ............................................................... 25 1.4.2.1 - ASI TS input (option)...................................................................... 25 1.4.2.2 - DVB Common Scr. (option) ........................................................... 27 1.4.2.3 - MPEG-2 4:2:2P@ML (option) ........................................................ 28 1.4.2.4 - RS232 (option) ............................................................................... 29 1.4.2.5 - Ext. Modulator C&C (option) .......................................................... 30 1.4.2.6 - DPSN board (option)...................................................................... 31 1.4.2.7 - 4 stereo audios (option) ................................................................. 32 1.4.2.8 - 2 AES/EBU interfaces (option)....................................................... 34 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

x

CONTENTS

1.4.2.9 - Int. modulator (option).................................................................... 1.4.2.10 - Alarm Relay Closure (option)....................................................... 1.4.2.11 - XLR adapter cord (option)............................................................ 1.4.2.12 - Source switching tolerance .......................................................... 1.4.3 - AC power supply ....................................................................................... 1.4.4 - Mechanical characteristics ........................................................................ 1.4.5 - Environmental specifications..................................................................... 1.4.6 - Equipment view .........................................................................................

35 36 37 37 38 39 42 45

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION 2.1 - Encoder installation ........................................................................................ 50 2.1.1 - Manual switch setting ................................................................................ 2.1.2 - Desktop installation ................................................................................... 2.1.3 - Rack installation ........................................................................................ 2.1.4 - Mains power supply and protective earth.................................................. 2.1.4.1 - Power supply ................................................................................. 2.1.4.2 - Connection to the techical earth .................................................... 2.1.4.3 - On/Off switch .................................................................................

50 53 53 55 55 56 56

2.2 - Board connections.......................................................................................... 57 2.2.1 - SSEB board (slot 0)................................................................................... 2.2.2 - DPSN board (slot 1) .................................................................................. 2.2.3 - COMPIN board (slot 1).............................................................................. 2.2.4 - AMUSE board (slot 2) ............................................................................... 2.2.5 - ISMB board (slot 2) ................................................................................... 2.2.6 - ATADI board (slot 4).................................................................................. 2.2.7 - Alarm Relay Closure ................................................................................. 2.2.8 - Modulator Control&Command...................................................................

58 65 66 68 73 75 77 79

2.3 - Switching on the device ................................................................................. 80 2.4 - Cable corrector in the case of a composite input ........................................ 81 2.4.1 - DPSN board .............................................................................................. 81 2.4.2 - COMPIN board.......................................................................................... 82 2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software..................................................................... 84 2.5.1 - Scope ........................................................................................................ 2.5.2 - Installation ................................................................................................. 2.5.2.1 - Environment................................................................................... 2.5.2.2 - Interface language for the applications ..........................................

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

84 84 84 85

47232437AK01 June 2003

CONTENTS

xi

2.5.2.3 - Setup procedure ............................................................................ 85 2.5.3 - Running the software ................................................................................ 95 2.6 - Installing optional boards............................................................................... 97 2.6.1 - Installing a board ....................................................................................... 97 2.6.2 - Removing the board .................................................................................. 98 2.7 - Installing software options ............................................................................. 99

CHAPTER 3 FRONT PANEL OPERATION 3.1 - Operating principle........................................................................................ 103 3.2 - Front panel overview..................................................................................... 104 3.3 - Welcome and main screens ......................................................................... 108 3.4 - Ergonomy....................................................................................................... 110 3.4.1 - Operating mode....................................................................................... 110 3.4.2 - Changing parameters ON AIR ................................................................ 112 3.5 - External modulator connection.................................................................... 113 3.6 - Menu tree........................................................................................................ 114 3.7 - Sections associated with the menu............................................................. 117 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens...................................... 118 3.8.1 - Main screen ............................................................................................. 3.8.2 - TRANSMIT screen .................................................................................. 3.8.3 - PRESET screen ...................................................................................... 3.8.3.1 - PRESET / Recall screen .............................................................. 3.8.3.2 - PRESET / Store screen ............................................................... 3.8.3.3 - PRESET / Erase screen .............................................................. 3.8.4 - MOD.SETUP screen ............................................................................... 3.8.4.1 - MOD.SETUP / Tx O/P screen...................................................... 3.8.4.2 - MOD.SETUP / If screen ............................................................... 3.8.4.3 - MOD.SETUP / L-Band screen ..................................................... 3.8.4.4 - MOD.SETUP / Convolution screen .............................................. 3.8.4.5 - MOD.SETUP / Symbol_R screen ................................................ 3.8.4.6 - MOD.SETUP / Info/Bandwidth screen ......................................... 3.8.4.7 - MOD.SETUP / Roll_off screen..................................................... 3.8.4.8 - MOD.SETUP / Spectrum screen ................................................. 3.8.5 - ENC.O/P screen ...................................................................................... 47232437AK01 June 2003

118 119 120 120 122 123 124 124 125 126 127 127 128 129 130 130

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

xii

CONTENTS

3.8.6 - ENCODING screen ................................................................................. 3.8.6.1 - ENCODING / Video screen.......................................................... 3.8.6.2 - ENCODING / Audio screen.......................................................... 3.8.6.3 - ENCODING / Data screen ........................................................... 3.8.7 - SCRAMBLING screen............................................................................. 3.8.8 - ALARM screen ........................................................................................ 3.8.9 - OTHER screen ........................................................................................ 3.8.9.1 - OTHER / Setup screen ................................................................ 3.8.9.2 - OTHER / Monitor screen.............................................................. 3.8.9.2.1 - OTHER / Monitor / Output screen.................................. 3.8.9.2.2 - OTHER / Monitor / Input screen .................................... 3.8.9.3 - OTHER / Tools screen................................................................. 3.8.9.3.1 - OTHER / Tools / Control screen .................................... 3.8.9.3.2 - OTHER / Tools / IP Address screen .............................. 3.8.9.3.4 - OTHER / Tools / Reboot screen .................................... 3.8.9.3.5 - OTHER / Tools / Option screen ..................................... 3.8.9.3.6 - OTHER / Tools / About screen ...................................... 3.8.9.3.7 - OTHER / Tools / Time screen........................................

131 131 133 134 135 136 137 137 138 138 139 141 141 141 143 143 146 148

CHAPTER 4 PC OPERATION - CONTROL & COMMAND SOFTWARE 4.1 - Ergonomic aspects ....................................................................................... 155 4.1.1 - Screen ..................................................................................................... 4.1.2 - Mouse...................................................................................................... 4.1.3 - Setting the interface language................................................................. 4.1.4 - On-line manuals ...................................................................................... 4.1.5 - Simulator mode ....................................................................................... 4.1.5.1 - Activation of simulator mode........................................................ 4.1.5.2 - Simulation of options.................................................................... 4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking .........................................................................

155 159 160 162 163 163 164 165

4.2 - Running software .......................................................................................... 168 4.3 - {Equipment Interface} application ............................................................... 170 4.4 - {Equipment Installation} application ........................................................... 173 4.4.1 - Purpose and scope of the application ..................................................... 4.4.2 - Screen layout .......................................................................................... 4.4.3 - Declaring the device................................................................................ 4.4.4 - Cancelling/validating device installation changes ................................... 4.4.4.1 - Cancelling changes to device installation ....................................

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

173 174 175 179 179

47232437AK01 June 2003

CONTENTS

4.4.4.2 - Validating changes to device installation ..................................... 4.4.5 - Additional device installation commands................................................. 4.4.5.1 - Remove a device ......................................................................... 4.4.5.2 - Change device name and address ..............................................

xiii

180 181 181 181

4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application......................................................... 184 4.5.1 - Purpose and scope of the application ..................................................... 4.5.2 - Screen layout .......................................................................................... 4.5.3 - Device parameters .................................................................................. 4.5.3.1 - Encoder operating parameters (advanced parameters) .............. 4.5.3.1.1 - “General” item ................................................................ 4.5.3.1.2 - “Output” item .................................................................. 4.5.3.1.3 - “Encoders” item.............................................................. 4.5.3.1.4 - “Data injection” item ....................................................... 4.5.3.1.5 - “Scrambler” item ............................................................ 4.5.3.1.6 - “SAM card” item ............................................................. 4.5.3.1.7 - “Access control” item ..................................................... 4.5.3.1.8 - “SIMS” item .................................................................... 4.5.3.1.9 - “Time” item..................................................................... 4.5.3.1.10 - “TBS Signalling” item ................................................... 4.5.3.1.11 - “ISO Signalling” item .................................................... 4.5.3.1.12 - “DVB Signalling” item................................................... 4.5.3.1.13 - “PSIP Signalling” item .................................................. 4.5.3.2 - Modulator parameters .................................................................. 4.5.3.3 - NIT table ...................................................................................... 4.5.3.3.1 - Edit the NIT .................................................................... 4.5.3.3.2 - Changing descriptors ..................................................... 4.5.3.3.3 - Deleting descriptors ....................................................... 4.5.3.3.4 - Saving/Loading a NIT .................................................... 4.5.3.4 - TOT table ..................................................................................... 4.5.3.4.1 - Edit the TOT................................................................... 4.5.3.4.2 - Changing descriptors ..................................................... 4.5.3.4.3 - Deleting descriptors ....................................................... 4.5.3.5 - Saving/Loading a device configuration ........................................ 4.5.3.6 - Archived configurations................................................................ 4.5.3.7 - Cancelling/Validating changes ..................................................... 4.5.3.8 - Device locking / unlocking............................................................ 4.5.4 - Generated Services................................................................................. 4.5.4.1 - TV service .................................................................................... 4.5.4.1.1 - Editing parameters of the video component .................. 4.5.4.1.2 - Editing parameters of the audio component .................. 4.5.4.1.3 - Editing parameters of the VBI component ..................... 4.5.4.1.4 - Editing parameters of the data component .................... 4.5.4.1.5 - PMT descriptors............................................................. 47232437AK01 June 2003

184 186 189 189 192 194 196 199 200 201 202 203 204 206 208 209 211 212 215 215 219 219 220 223 223 227 227 228 230 235 237 238 239 243 255 264 271 283

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

xiv

CONTENTS

4.5.4.1.6 - SDT descriptors ............................................................. 4.5.4.2 - Advanced Functions .................................................................... 4.5.4.2.1 - Shared components....................................................... 4.5.4.2.2 - Ghost components......................................................... 4.5.4.2.3 - Inband command ........................................................... 4.5.5 - TS input ................................................................................................... 4.5.5.1 - First level filtering: stopping/passing the TS input........................ 4.5.5.2 - Second level filtering: filtering conditions on the tributary, selecting services and EMM flows ................................................ 4.5.5.2.1 - General filtering conditions on the tributary ................... 4.5.5.2.2 - Selection of services ...................................................... 4.5.5.2.3 - Selection of EMM flows ................................................. 4.5.5.3 - Third level filtering: filtering conditions on services...................... 4.5.5.3.1 - General filtering conditions ............................................ 4.5.5.3.2 - Individual filtering of components .................................. 4.5.5.3.3 - Attaching components ................................................... 4.5.5.3.4 - Removing a service ....................................................... 4.5.5.4 - Fourth level filtering: filtering conditions on components ............. 4.5.5.4.1 - General filtering conditions ............................................ 4.5.5.4.2 - Removing a component .................................................

289 290 290 291 293 293 298 298 298 303 306 309 309 312 316 321 322 322 324

4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application .................................................... 326 4.6.1 - Purpose and scope of the application ..................................................... 4.6.2 - Screen layout .......................................................................................... 4.6.3 - Alarm supervision.................................................................................... 4.6.3.1 - Alarms window............................................................................. 4.6.3.2 - Equipment window....................................................................... 4.6.4 - Supervision of services and data flow ..................................................... 4.6.5 - Save all/Load all commands ................................................................... 4.6.6 - Maintenance commands ......................................................................... 4.6.7 - Audible warning of alarms .......................................................................

326 327 334 334 338 340 343 344 350

4.7 - {Download} application ............................................................................... 351 4.7.1 - Purpose and scope of the application ..................................................... 4.7.2 - Screen layout .......................................................................................... 4.7.3 - Procedure................................................................................................ 4.7.3.1 - Before downloading ..................................................................... 4.7.3.2 - Downloading ................................................................................ 4.7.3.3 - After downloading ........................................................................ 4.7.4 - Additional commands ..............................................................................

351 351 353 353 358 359 360

4.8 - {Event Log} application ............................................................................... 362 4.8.1 - Principles of the {Event Log} application ................................................. 362 4.8.1.1 - Event............................................................................................ 362

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

CONTENTS

4.8.1.2 - View configuration functions ........................................................ 4.8.1.3 - Event exporting ............................................................................ 4.8.1.4 - Miscellaneous .............................................................................. 4.8.2 - Screen layout .......................................................................................... 4.8.3 - Commands .............................................................................................. 4.8.3.1 - Commands for opening an event log file ..................................... 4.8.3.2 - Command for exporting in text format.......................................... 4.8.3.3 - Display commands....................................................................... 4.8.3.4 - Calculation commands.................................................................

xv

363 363 364 364 368 368 369 371 376

4.9 - {Alarm Help} application............................................................................... 379 4.9.1 - Scope ...................................................................................................... 4.9.2 - Features .................................................................................................. 4.9.2.1 - Extended description of alarms.................................................... 4.9.2.2 - Print capability.............................................................................. 4.9.2.3 - Search engine .............................................................................. 4.9.2.4 - Navigation tool ............................................................................. 4.9.2.5 - Synchronisation with the {Monitoring & Redundancy} and {Event Log} applications.......................................................... 4.9.2.6 - Synchronisation with other applications ....................................... 4.9.2.7 - User defined comments ............................................................... 4.9.2.8 - French/English versions............................................................... 4.9.2.9 - Customisation of display .............................................................. 4.9.2.10 - Summary of alarms .................................................................... 4.9.2.11 - Help / About ............................................................................... 4.9.3 - Access to the {Alarm help} application .................................................... 4.9.3.1 - Access via the {Monitoring &Redundancy} application ................ 4.9.3.2 - Access via the {Event Log} application ........................................ 4.9.3.3 - Access via any application ........................................................... 4.9.4 - User Interface (main window and commands) ........................................

379 379 379 380 380 380 380 380 380 381 381 381 381 382 382 382 383 384

4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application..................................... 390 4.10.1 - Using the Telnet application .................................................................. 4.10.2 - IP Settings ............................................................................................. 4.10.3 - Parameter definitions ............................................................................ 4.10.3.1 - Video bidir .................................................................................. 4.10.3.2 - Audio stream type ...................................................................... 4.10.3.3 - LTW_offset................................................................................. 4.10.3.4 - SPE (SuperEncoder) switch source mode................................. 4.10.3.5 - VBI stream type ......................................................................... 4.10.3.6 - LDSChurch mode ...................................................................... 4.10.3.7 - ABSAT mode ............................................................................. 4.10.3.8 - Multichoice-D1 mode ................................................................. 4.10.3.9 - Foxtel 6dB uplift ......................................................................... 47232437AK01 June 2003

390 396 397 397 397 398 398 398 398 399 399 400

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

xvi

CONTENTS

4.10.3.10 - Closed Caption type................................................................. 401 4.10.3.11 - Extended-data insertion (line 284) ........................................... 401

CHAPTER 5 PC OPERATION - FAST_DSNG SOFTWARE 5.1 - Fast-DSNG ..................................................................................................... 405 5.2 - Software presentation................................................................................... 407 5.3 - Interfaces ....................................................................................................... 410 5.3.1 - Encoder interface .................................................................................... 410 5.3.2 - Modulator/up-converter interface ............................................................ 410 5.3.3 - Graphic interface ..................................................................................... 410 5.4 - Functions ....................................................................................................... 411 5.4.1 - Modulator configuration........................................................................... 411 5.4.2 - Encoder configuration ............................................................................. 411 5.4.3 - Supervision.............................................................................................. 411 5.5 - Operation ....................................................................................................... 413 5.5.1 - General principles ................................................................................... 5.5.2 - Setup panel ............................................................................................. 5.5.3 - Transmission panel ................................................................................. 5.5.3.1 - Transmission parameters ............................................................ 5.5.3.2 - Parameters linked to encoder control and signal content ............ 5.5.4 - Alarms panel ........................................................................................... 5.5.5 - Scrambling panel..................................................................................... 5.5.6 - Information panel..................................................................................... 5.5.7 - Preset panel ............................................................................................ 5.5.8 - Dynamic behaviour.................................................................................. 5.5.8.1 - No connection .............................................................................. 5.5.8.2 - Setting up a connection ...............................................................

413 414 416 417 419 426 427 429 430 432 432 432

CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 6.1 - Device connection problems ....................................................................... 436 6.2 - Inspecting the power supply fuse ............................................................... 437 6.3 - Miscellaneous problems............................................................................... 438

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

CONTENTS

6.3.1 - Fan life expectancy ................................................................................. 6.3.2 - Front panel LCD blank ............................................................................ 6.3.3 - Default analogue video input................................................................... 6.3.4 - Autotest problem ..................................................................................... 6.3.5 - Recommendations when using the MSU 4440 decoder .........................

xvii

438 438 438 438 439

CHAPTER 7 CUSTOMER SERVICE 7.1 - EU Declaration of conformity ....................................................................... 443 7.2 - FCC Declaration of conformity..................................................................... 444 7.3 - Return your comments ................................................................................. 445 7.4 - NEXTREAM Customer Services................................................................... 446

CHAPTER 8 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACROYNMS Abbreviations and acronyms .............................................................................. 451

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

xviii

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

CONTENTS

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 1 - Specifications

1

Chapter 1 Specifications 1.1 - Encoding system overview ................................................................... 3 1.2 - DBE 4110 overview ................................................................................ 4 1.3 - Sales references..................................................................................... 6 1.4 - Specifications ......................................................................................... 8 1.4.1 - Description of basic functions ........................................................... 8 1.4.1.1 - Video audio interface (SDI) .............................................................. 8 1.4.1.2 - De-embedded audio inputs .............................................................. 8 1.4.1.3 - Analogue audio inputs with 2 stereo audio ...................................... 9 1.4.1.4 - TS output ......................................................................................... 9 1.4.1.5 - Control and command interface ..................................................... 10 1.4.1.6 - MPEG-2 4:2:0MP@ML .................................................................. 12 1.4.1.7 - Audio encoder ................................................................................ 13 1.4.1.8 - SI/PSI management ....................................................................... 14 1.4.1.9 - Low delay mode ............................................................................. 14 1.4.1.10 - Private data .................................................................................. 15 1.4.1.11 - Stream Editing ............................................................................. 17 1.4.1.12 - VBI processing ............................................................................. 18 1.4.1.13 - COMPIN board ............................................................................ 23

1.4.2 - Description of optional functions..................................................... 25 1.4.2.1 - ASI TS input (option)...................................................................... 1.4.2.2 - DVB Common Scr. (option) ........................................................... 1.4.2.3 - MPEG-2 4:2:2P@ML (option) ........................................................ 1.4.2.4 - RS232 (option) ............................................................................... 1.4.2.5 - Ext. Modulator C&C (option) .......................................................... 1.4.2.6 - DPSN board (option)...................................................................... 1.4.2.7 - 4 stereo audios (option) ................................................................. 1.4.2.8 - 2 AES/EBU interfaces (option)....................................................... 1.4.2.9 - Int. modulator (option) .................................................................... 1.4.2.10 - Alarm Relay Closure (option) ....................................................... 1.4.2.11 - XLR adapter cord (option)............................................................ 1.4.2.12 - Source switching tolerance ..........................................................

25 27 28 29 30 31 32 34 35 36 37 37

1.4.3 - AC power supply............................................................................. 38 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

2

Chapter 1 - Specifications

1.4.4 - Mechanical characteristics ............................................................. 39 1.4.5 - Environmental specifications .......................................................... 42 1.4.6 - Equipment view .............................................................................. 45

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 1 1.1 - Encoding system overview

3

1.1 - ENCODING SYSTEM OVERVIEW

The DBE 4110 DSNG encoder has been designed to meet the main operational Digital SNG requirements: robustness, reduced size (2RU) and weight, easy to use and to set up, high quality video and audio, low delay and ultra low delay modes for live interviews.

video, audio, data

Encoder DBE 4110

TS C&C

Modulator

Figure 1.1: DBE 4110 system overview

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

4

Chapter 1 1.2 - DBE 4110 overview

1.2 - DBE 4110 OVERVIEW

The DBE 4110 is a compact MPEG-2-standard encoding (or compression) device offering both MP@ML and 4:2:2P@ML standard. The use of the 4:2:2 Profile allows compression rates of up to 50Mbit/s without prior sub-sampling and ensures a high quality compression. Performance and cost-effectiveness are achieved through the THOMSON second generation chipset which offers five-level hierarchical motion estimation, far-ranging motion vector calculations and two-pass rate control for improved bit-rate allocation. The DBE 4110 single-service encoder performs encoding from a composite source or SDI with or without embedded audio. A maximum of 6 separate audio inputs are available. The DBE 4110 ensures interoperability with DVB-standard equipment. A fully DVB-compliant transport stream composed of video, audios, data as well as SI/PSI information is delivered directly in DVB-ASI format. Furthermore the DBE 4110 is fully compliant with the scrambling features defined by EBU (namely mode 1), for exchanging scrambled MPEG-2 streams. The DBE 4110 can be controlled through its front panel to facilitate basic operation. The DBE 4110 is provided with two Control&Command software programs, running on Windows NTTM based PC station using an Ethernet 10 baseT interface: • Fast_DSNG software for easy and intuitive operation, specially designed for DSNG operators, • Stand-Alone Control&Command software for advanced operation.

This document refers to release 7.0 of the DBE 4110.

Figure 1.2 gives an overview of the DBE 4110.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 1 1.2 - DBE 4110 overview

PAL/ SECAM/ NTSC PAL/ NTSC

Alarms 4:2:2 // Composite Video Interface DPSN board 4:2:2 // COMPIN board SDI Video Audio Interface

SDI IN

2 AES/EBU 2 stereo anal. audios

5

ATADI board ADC

SDI and AES/EBU TS IN ASI ASI Interface RS 232

TS

Alarm relay

MSDL board

MPEG-2 Video Encoder

Modulated output ISMB board VBI Processor

MUX ASI Interface

2 x MPEG-1 Audio Encoders

4 x MPEG-1 Audio Encoders AMuSE board

Basic

Data Interface

Scrambler

Hardware or Software option

Control/Command

LCD

Alarms

Figure 1.2: DBE 4110 overall block diagram

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

6

Chapter 1 1.3 - Sales references

1.3 - SALES REFERENCES

DBE 4110 DSNG encoder (with deactivated DVB-CS scrambler: N4110220AK, or without scrambling capability: N4110220BK), including: • Basic audio/video encoder, • COMPIN board, • Low Delay Mode, • VBI Processing, • 100 to 230 VAC power supply, ∗

Software options: • ASI TS input (N41STS1NAK), • DVB Common Scr. (N41SDVCFAK), • MPEG-2 4:2:2P@ML (N41S422PAK), • RS 232 (N41SD56KAK), • Ext. Modulator C&C (N41SM0DCAK).

Important: All software options are purchased for, and attributed to, a given DBE 4110 unit and may not apply to several units. Each software option is attributed a licence number which is requested prior to use. ∗

Hardware options: • 4 stereo audios (N41HAMUBAK): AMuSE board, • 2 AES/EBU interfaces (N41HATADAK): ATADI board, • Alarm Relay Closure (N41HMSDLAK): RSMAINT and MSDL boards, • DPSN board (N41HDPSNAK), • Int. Modulator (N41HM0DUAK): ISMB board, • XLR adapter cord (N41HAXLRAK).

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 1 1.3 - Sales references

7

Board connections

SSEB (basic) ATADI (option) MSDL (option)

COMPIN (basic) or DPSN (option) AMuSE (option) or ISMB (option)

Figure 1.3: DBE 4110 rear panel

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

8

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

1.4 - SPECIFICATIONS

1.4.1 - Description of basic functions 1.4.1.1 - Video audio interface (SDI) The SMPTE 259M standard SDI input uses a female 75Ω BNC connector. It accepts a 270Mbit/s “component” 625 or 525 line serial stream. It operates with a 0200m length cable (type RG11A/V Filotex or 8281 Belden).

1.4.1.2 - De-embedded audio inputs Audio de-embedding is SMPTE 272MA-compliant. Audio de-embedding is possible when: • the video encoder uses the SDI input, • the video encoder is not used and there is a signal at the SDI input, and is not possible when the video encoder uses the composite video input. The 270Mbit/s signal can contain up to 8 stereo audios. The DBE 4110 can deembed 2 stereo audios which are either: • stereos 1 and 2 (DID = 2FF), or • stereos 3 and 4 (DID = 1FD), or • stereos 5 and 6 (DID = 1FB), or • stereos 7 and 8 (DID = 2F9). Characteristics: • synchronous 48kHz 20 bits audio, • de-embedding of 2 stereo audio channels, • C, U and V bits are ignored, • no pre-emphasis or de-emphasis.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

9

1.4.1.3 - Analogue audio inputs with 2 stereo audio

CHARACTERISTICS • Input impedance set to 600Ω for all measurements. • Input level adjustment set to 24dBu for all measurements. • All measurements are performed with MPEG-1 compression, layer 2, 256kbit/s stereo bitrate. Input type

Balanced

Input impedance

600Ω +/− 5% or high impedance (typ. 18kΩ)

Input level adjustment

0dBFS = +8 to +24dBu (in steps of 1dB)

Common mode rejection ratio

> 60dB from 20Hz to 20kHz

Bandwidth (measured with a sinus sweep)

20Hz to 20kHz, (+/- 0.3dB) Vin = 23.5dBu

Insertion gain

+/- 0.3dB Vin = 23.5dBu, 1kHz

Total harmonic distortion + noise

<0.01% (ADC only) at 1kHz <0.1% (ADC + MPEG-1 compression) RMS measurement, from 20Hz to 20kHz Vin = 23.5dBu

Signal to noise ratio

≥ 85dB Vin = 23.5dBu at 1kHz RMS measurement, from 20Hz to 20kHz, unweighted

Crosstalk between any two mono channels

≥ 80dB V(in) = 23.5dBu, 1kHz

ADC resolution / sampling frequency

18 bits / 48kHz

Emphasis

no pre-emphasis or de-emphasis

1.4.1.4 - TS output The SSEB board delivers three identical ASI standard TS outputs on a female 75Ω BNC connector. The ASI output runs at a constant 270Mbit/s. The TS data rate is

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

10

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

supplemented with stuffing bytes to reach 270Mbit/s. “Data burst” mode is implemented (individual bytes spread out in time). The minimum TS data rate is 1Mbit/s and the maximum TS data rate is 54Mbit/s. TS packet length is 188 or 204 bytes. In 204-byte mode, the last 16 bytes are set to the value zero and are meant to be replaced by an error correction code (Reed Solomon) in a downstream modulator. CHARACTERISTICS Standard

CENELEC: EN50083-9

Mode

Data burst

Signal amplitude

800mV ± 10%

Rise / fall time

≤ 1.2ns

Random jitter (using D21.5 signal)

≤ ± 4%

1.4.1.5 - Control and command interface The DBE 4110 encoder can be operated either locally (front panel control) or by remote control (using Control&Command software running on Windows NT based PC station) using an Ethernet 10 baseT interface. CHARACTERISTICS Standard

IEEE 802.3 - 10 Base T

Connector type

RJ45 connector

Protocol

TCP - IP based protocol

Two Control&Command software programs are provided: • Fast_DSNG software for easy and intuitive operation, specially designed for DSNG operators. Its main window is shown in the figure below, • Stand-Alone Control&Command software for advanced operation. Attention : Some functions are not controlled by all the interfaces.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

11

The recommended configuration of the PC supporting the stand-alone software is as follows: • 300 MHz Pentium II microprocessor, 64Mb RAM, • 1.2Gb Hard drive, • WINDOWS NT version 4 or WINDOWS 2000 software, • ETHERNET board (e.g. Compaq Integrated Netelligent 10/100 TX PQ Network Adapter), • TCP/IP command interface (Microsoft TCP/IP-32), • Screen 17 ", resolution SVGA (800x600), colour, • Mouse.

The DBS 2930 Stand-Alone software provided can only control one encoder. To control a complete broadcast system, please refer to the DBS 2930 datasheet for details.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

12

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

1.4.1.6 - MPEG-2 4:2:0MP@ML Video encoding complies with MPEG-2 standard ISO/IEC 13818-2. CHARACTERISTICS Video source

• 50/60Hz frequencya • Interlaced /progressive 4:2:2 video • 10 bits

Encoding format

• 2:1 vertical filtering (chrominance) • 720, 704, 544, 480, 352 pixels • 576 lines (50Hz) or 480 lines (60Hz) • SIF mode (352 pixels, 288 lines (50 Hz) or 240 lines (60Hz))

GOP parameters

•1≤M≤3 • M ≤ N ≤ 24 • Possibility of closed GOP • Frame picture with adaptive field/frame encoding modes (motion estimation and DCT) • Seamless M and N parameter changing

Aspect ratio

• Manual 4/3, 16/9, • Automatic from WSS information or AFD information.

Motion estimation vector range (frame based)

+126/-126 Vertical +254.5/-255 Horizontal

Bit rate

• VBV model implementation • Bit rate type: CBR • Bit rate parameters: 100kbit/s steps 0.5Mbit/s ≤ bit rate ≤ 15Mbit/s • SIF at 500kbit/s (bitrates between 500Kbit/s and 2Mbit/s are reserved for almost still pictures, depending on encoding resolution and picture complexity) • Seamless bit rate change

Video buffer management

Leak mode

Miscellaneous functions

• Detection of scene cuts, 3/2 pull down, bad edit • Capture and transmission of Digital Vertical Time Code (into GOP header). • 75% bar pattern insertion

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

13

CHARACTERISTICS Normal delay

• Delay from SDI encoder input to PTS value (+/- 5ms): 740ms (50Hz), 617ms (60Hz), guaranteed delay from 1.5 to 15Mbit/s.

a.Throughout the document, the value 60Hz in relation to video signal implies a real value of 59.94Hz

1.4.1.7 - Audio encoder The SSEB board features 2 MPEG-1 audio encoders in accordance with ISO/IEC 11172-3, layer 2, 48kHz standard. For each audio encoder, possible rate / mode combinations are listed in the table below: Rate (kbit/s) 64

96

128

192

256

384

X

X

X

Dual Channel

X

X

X

X

Stereo

X

X

X

X

Joint Stereo

X

X

X

X

Mode Single Channel (Mono)

X

The audio encoding module performs automatic audio/video compensation delay. The audio encoding module has audio pattern generation capability (2.1kHz 0dBFS signal). Input selection between analogue audio, de-embedded audio and AES/EBU audio (N41HATADAK option) is separate for the 2 MPEG-1 audio encoders. Selection is supervision-controlled. Mono, stereo or dual-channel can be selected either manually, or automatically from VPS information when present in the video source. All command running is seamless apart from audio/video compensation delay modification, analogue input level adjustment and changing between one and two PIDs. Each MPEG-1 dual channel encoder can be configured in such a way that it is conveyed as a single PID or as two distinct PIDs. In this case the audio encoder generates two single channel elementary streams, both having the same

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

14

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

configuration except for the PID and the language code (both components will have the same bitrate, etc.). When there is no video component, the MPEG-1 encoder is in “radio mode” and the delay (from SDI encoder input to PTS value, +/- 5ms) becomes equal to 150ms (50Hz and 60Hz).

1.4.1.8 - SI/PSI management The DBE 4110 has three operating modes for signalling generation: • no signalling generated, • generation of ISO tables (PAT, CAT, PMT, TSDT), • generation of DVB tables (ISO tables + SDT, TDT, TOT, BAT, NIT). The operating mode is selected by the operator. The DBE 4110 regularly broadcasts signalling information according to repetition rates that can be set up from the Control & Command station (remote control). Tables required for DVB DSNG operation are automatically generated according to transmitted signal configuration.

1.4.1.9 - Low delay mode Two trade offs between delay and video compression quality are now available: “Low delay” mode 4:2:0MP@ML MPEG-2 video

• Delay from SDI encoder input to PTS value (+/- 5ms): 320ms (50Hz), 267ms (60Hz), guaranteed delay from 4 to 15Mbit/s. • I and P pictures, no B picture.

4:2:2P@ML MPEG-2 video

• Delay from SDI encoder input to PTS value (+/- 5ms): 280ms (50Hz), 233ms (60Hz), guaranteed delay from 6 to 50Mbit/s. • I and P pictures, no B picture.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

15

“Ultra low delay” mode 4:2:0MP@ML MPEG-2 video

• Delay from SDI encoder input to PTS value (+/- 5ms): 140ms (50Hz), 134ms (60Hz), guaranteed delay from 6 to 15Mbit/s. • I pictures, no P and B pictures.

4:2:2P@ML MPEG-2 video

• Delay from SDI encoder input to PTS value (+/- 5ms): 100ms (50Hz), 100ms (60Hz), guaranteed delay from 6 to 50Mbit/s. • I pictures, no P and B pictures.

SIF mode is not available in ultra low delay mode. Use of MSU 4422 decoder adds approximately 70 ms to each delay. Switching between normal and low delay or ultra low delay is not seamless (picture is disturbed for 2 or 3 seconds). Bitrates below 4Mbit/s in low delay / 4:2:0 mode, and bitrates below 6Mbit/s in low delay / 4:2:2 mode and ultra low delay mode are reserved for almost still pictures, depending on encoding resolution and picture complexity.

1.4.1.10 - Private data The possibility of entering private data via Ethernet, as TS packets or sections, is included in the basic version of the DBE 4110 (List of supported protocols in the second table below).

CHARACTERISTICS Standard

IEEE 802.3 - 10 Base T

Connector type

RJ45 connector

Protocol

TCP - IP based protocol

When data is injected as MPEG-2 TS packets, the DBE 4110 may perform PID remapping. The TS packets received are not supposed to contain a PCR or a PTS. When data is injected as DVB sections, the DBE 4110 performs packetisation. 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

16

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

Maximum data rate depends on Ethernet network traffic. When the Ethernet network is not a limiting factor, the guaranteed maximum data rate depends on internal conditions; it is never under 64kbit/s and can go up to 750kbit/s when the following conditions are met: • TS input unused, • 1 service composed of: - 0 or 1 video component, - and 0 or 1 audio component, - and 0 to 4 ECM components. • The maximum permitted data rate parameter is set at 1 Mbit/s.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

17

7.0 release protocols

Title

THOMSON proprietary protocol

MPEG1 1G/2G Control/Command protocol Messages description

VIACCESS proprietary protocol V1.0

Dossier de spécifications fonctionnelles détaillées Diffuseur de Messagerie réf. R/PACMAN/DM/SPE01

TCP DVB simulcrypt

ETSI TS 103 197 Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) Head-End Implementation of DVB simulcrypt ETSI TS 101 197-1 Technical specification of Simulcrypt in DVB systems (06/97)

UDP DVB simulcrypt with TCP control layer

ETSI TS 103 197 Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) Head-End Implementation of DVB simulcrypt

UDP DVB simulcrypt without TCP control layer

ETSI TS 103 197 Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) Head-End Implementation of DVB simulcrypt

1.4.1.11 - Stream Editing In order to obtain an editable MPEG stream between two time code values, the DBE 4110 encoder can insert an I picture and create a closed GOP when the incoming DVITC reaches a predefined value. The DBE 4110 automatically chooses the DVITC if it is on lines 19 and 332 (50Hz) or lines 11 and 274 (60Hz). If the DVITC is on other lines, the user must specify the lines using the DBS 2930 Control&Command software. The predefined value is sent to the DBE 4110 via MTEP / TCP/IP protocol (available on request). This value must be sent in advance with reference to the current time code value. The DBE 4110 can store up to 32 preset values. About this limit the new values are ignored. Notes: - Stream Editing does not operate with the VITC. - Stream Editing does not operate in 60Hz drop frame mode.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

18

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

- Stream Editing does not operate with the video in 4:2:2:P. - Stream Editing does not operate in low or ultra low delay mode.

The video buffer level is controlled so as to be more constant at each edit point (close to the maximum level). Please contact NEXTREAM for additional information if you are interested in this function.

1.4.1.12 - VBI processing This module is capable of processing ancillary data from either the SDI or the PAL input. The following diagrams describe the different ways ancillary data can or cannot be processed:

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

19

Diagram

1

VBI video

Diagram

2

video + VBI

PAL SDI

PAL SDI

Diagram

3

video + VBI

PAL SDI

Diagram

4

video VBI

Diagram

5

VBI video + VBI

PAL SDI

PAL SDI

Figure 1.4: Ancillary data processing

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

20

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

• Diagram 1 shows a VBI inserter function. VBI information from the composite video signal is conveyed in the TS bitstream as described in DVB standard. The composite video signal must be externally synchronised with the SDI video source. • Diagrams 2 and 3 illustrate a common setup. • Diagram 4 shows a configuration similar to diagram 1 but which is not supported. • Diagram 5 illustrates the fact that the DBE 4110 cannot simultaneously process VBI information coming from both video inputs.

The VBI processor capabilities are described in the following table.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

21

Possible lines (starting from 1)

Data

Frequency

Data standards

Input

Signal

Ceefax B magazine and/or subtitles

50Hz

ITU-R.BT653 ETS 300 706

SDI or Composite

waveform

Transparent lines

50Hz

VITC

50Hz

IEC 60461 SMPTE 12M

SDI or Composite

waveform

6 to 22

DVITC

50Hz

SMPTE 266M

SDI

waveform

6 to 22

WSS

50Hz

ETS300 294

SDI or Composite

waveform

23

WSS

50Hz

Proprietary based on SMPTE 291M

SDI

binary

23

VPS

50Hz

ETS 300 231

SDI or Composite

waveform

16

AFD

50Hz

First part of viideo index SMPTE RP186

SDI

11 and 324

Transparent lines

60Hz

SDI or Composite

10 to 21 273 to 284

VITC

60Hz

IEC 60461 SMPTE 12M

SDI or Composite

waveform

10 to 21

DVITC

60Hz

SMPTE 266M

SDI

waveform

10 to 21

Closed caption

60Hz

EIA-608

SDI or Composite

waveform

21

47232437AK01 June 2003

SDI or Composite

6 to 22 320 to 335 6 to 22 318 to 335

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

22

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

Max treated lines

Treatment

Ceefax B magazine and/or subtitles

16 per field

demodulated then mapped into TS packets

ETSI EN 300 472 DVB A056 ETSI EN 301 775

a

Transparent lines

8 per frame

luminance samples, 8 bits, 720 samples/line, mapped into TS packets

DVB A056 ETSI EN 301 775

b

VITC

1

demodulated then mapped into GOP header

ISO/IEC 13818-2

DVITC

1

demodulated then mapped into GOP header

ISO/IEC 13818-2

WSS

1

demodulated then mapped into TS packets and/or used to inform the video encoder

DVB A056 ETSI EN 301 775

WSS

1

binary WSS from DBI 2000 (AVA) is mapped into TS packets and/or used to inform the video encoders

DVB A056 ETSI EN 301 775

VPS

1

demodulated, then mapped into TS packets and/or used to control the audio encoders

DVB A056 ETSI EN 301 775

AFD

2

inserted into video stream

Transparent lines

8 per frame

VITC

Data

MPEG standards

c

ARDSPE1 24 april 1998

luminance samples, 8 bits, 720 samples/line, mapped into TS packets

DVB A056 ETSI EN 301 775

1

demodulated then mapped into GOP header

ISO/IEC 13818-2

DVITC

1

demodulated then mapped into GOP header

ISO/IEC 13818-2

Closed caption

1

demodulated then mapped into video user data

ATSC A/53

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

Notes

b

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

23

a.Since 6.5 release, CEEFAX extraction from the incoming video signal has been improved. The data positionning window has been widened to +/-1µs. Demodulation process benefits from an automatic threshold level adjustment. b.Restrictions of DVB A056 concerning the MSU 4422 decoder. c.Not recommended for new systems.

Notes 1. Data cannot be encoded simultaneously according to 50Hz and 60Hz MPEG-2 standard. 2. Each CEEFAX B, VPS, WSS can be mapped into its individual PID (max. 4 PID) or all the previous can be mapped together into the same PID. 3. The same VBI line cannot be associated with different PIDs.

1.4.1.13 - COMPIN board The COMPIN board provides composite video input for the DBE 41xx encoders. The COMPIN board fits in the upper 6U slot. INPUT CHARACTERISTICS Standard

PAL BDGHI / NTSC M (ITU-R Rec. 624)

Input impedance

BNC / 75Ω

Input level (100% white bar)

1 volt peak-to-peak, nominal, with sync signal

Note: the COMPIN board does not handle SECAM standard.

ENCODER + DECODER CHARACTERISTICS PAL STANDARD (excluding VTR and synchronised modes)

WITH MSU 4422 DECODER

Measurement conditions set A (video encoding)

4:2:2P, GOP 1/1, 50Mbit/s, 720 pixels

Measurement conditions set B (video encoding)

4:2:0MP@ML, GOP 12/3, 14Mbit/s, 720 pixels

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

24

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

ENCODER + DECODER CHARACTERISTICS PAL STANDARD (excluding VTR and synchronised modes)

WITH MSU 4422 DECODER

0.15 to 5.5MHz ± 0.5dB (-3dB at 5.7MHz)

Luminance bandwidth Luminance signal to noise ratio (ramp pattern, filtered and weighted) set A set B

≥ 61dB ≥ 60dB

Differential gain

≤ 1.5%

Differential phase

≤ 2°

Luminance amplitude linearity

700mV ± 14mV

ENCODER + DECODER CHARACTERISTICS NTSC STANDARD (excluding VTR and synchronised modes)

WITH MSU 4422 DECODER

Measurement conditions set A (video encoding)

4:2:2P, GOP 1/1, 50Mbit/s, 720 pixels

Measurement conditions set B (video encoding)

4:2:0MP@ML, GOP 12/3, 14Mbit/s, 720 pixels

Luminance bandwidth (set B)

0.15 to 3.8MHz ± 0.5dB (-3dB at 4.1MHz)

Luminance signal to noise ratio (ramp pattern, filtered and weighted) set A set B

≥ 61dB ≥ 60dB

Differential gain

≤ 2%

Differential phase

≤ 2°

Luminance amplitude linearity

700mV ± 14mV

Note: COMPIN signal to noise ratio is measured in a different way in comparison with the DPSN board. In the same conditions, the value for the COMPIN board would be approximatively 3dB higher. THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

25

The COMPIN board features a VTR mode which is recommended for using bad quality, jittered signals. In VTR mode, the sampling is made on 8 bits instead of 10 and the bandwidth is around 3MHz. The COMPIN board features a built-in synchroniser. This synchroniser can be used in order to synchronise video input to an external composite video reference. This synchroniser can also be used with or without an external reference in order to help the encoder to deal with bad quality signals. The COMPIN board does not add any delay, except when the built-in synchroniser is activated and in that case it adds approximatively 30ms in 50Hz and 25ms in 60Hz. The synchroniser drops or repeats a frame when the accumulative delay between the input and the reference is excessive. Hence the lipsync evolves like a sawtooth between - 10ms and + 30ms (in 50Hz, without reference signal). In normal mode and in NTSC standard, the COMPIN board can be programmed to take into account or not a 7.5 IRE setup.

1.4.2 - Description of optional functions 1.4.2.1 - ASI TS input (option) Sales reference: N41STS1NAK ASI standard TS input on a female 75Ω BNC connector. The 270Mbit/s signal can carry 188/204 length TS packets. The max. TS data rate is 54Mbit/s. The TS Input interface accepts both “data burst” and “data packet” modes. Incoming data must be spread over time, so that no more than one TS packet is received over a period of 26µs. The external TS ASI input can be used for encoder cascading: up to three encoders can be cascaded by connecting the ASI output of one encoder to the ASI input of another one. This results in an MPTS with consistent PSI/SI tables, each video source having its own PCR unless the locking on incoming PCR is used (see the section below). To perform encoder cascading from the front panel, only one parameter must be set. When encoders are cascaded, incoming PID/service-id can be remapped to avoid conflicts.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

26

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

Notes: - DBE 4110 TS OUT connected to DBE 4110 TS IN operates with a cable up to 200m in length, BELDEN 8281 type. - A programme going from ASI IN to ASI OUT will undergo a PCR jitter increase of +/75ns max. The maximum PCR jitter allowed by DVB standard is +/- 500ns. A programme encoded by a DBE 41XX will present an original PCR jitter of +/- 37.5 ns max.

∗

Locking on incoming PCR

This function requires the ASI TS input option. It is possible to create a single programme with components generated by more than one encoder. The principal application is the generation of a programme containing one video component and many audio components, like a "mosaic" programme or a mutilingual programme. All encoders must receive the same video source (even an encoder which is used only for audio encoding), and all encoders must use the same PCR. All encoders must be set to provide the same end to end delay. The use of the same PCR by all encoders is made possible by the new ability of the encoder to lock its internal PCR generator on the PCR coming from a component present in the ASI TS input stream. We recommend that you limit the cascade to three or less devices.

TS IN

TS OUT

TS IN

DBE 41xx VIDEO IN

TS OUT

DBE 41xx VIDEO IN

TS IN

TS OUT

DBE 41xx VIDEO IN

If a progam requires more than three encoders, it is better to install them in parallel and use a multiplexer to gather the components.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

27

TS IN

TS IN

TS OUT

DBE 41xx VIDEO IN

TS IN

DBX 4300 TS IN

TS OUT

TS OUT

DBE 41xx VIDEO IN

TS IN

TS IN

TS OUT

DBE 41xx VIDEO IN

1.4.2.2 - DVB Common Scr. (option) Sales reference: N41SDVCFAK This option includes the capability to scramble the outgoing transport stream according to the DVB common scrambling standard. The DBE 4110 is fully compliant with the scrambling features defined by EBU (BISS modes 1 and E), for exchanging scrambled MPEG-2 streams. The control word is fixed. The fixed control word can be set using the front panel. No ECMs are broadcast in this case, and there is no need for EMM generation. The control word must be entered in the decoder to enable descrambling. Attention : 1. The incoming stream from the ASI input cannot be scrambled from the front panel and the Fast_DSNG software. To scramble the incoming stream, the encoder must be controlled by the DBS 2930 software with the N2930140 option (fixed control word) and the DBS 2908/11/12 MPEG Channel Controller. 2. The BISS mode E is only controlled by the front panel.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

28

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

1.4.2.3 - MPEG-2 4:2:2P@ML (option) Sales reference: N41S422PAK CHARACTERISTICS Video source

• 50/60Hz frequency • Interlaced /progressive 4:2:2 video • 10 bits

Encoding format

• 720 pixels • 576 lines (50Hz) or 480 lines (60Hz)

GOP parameters

•1≤M≤3 • M ≤ N ≤ 24 • Possibility of closed GOP • Frame picture with adaptive field/frame encoding modes (motion estimation and DCT) • Seamless M and N parameter changing

Bit rate

• VBV model implementation • Bit rate type: CBR • Bit rate parameters: 100kbit/s steps 0.5Mbit/s ≤ bit rate ≤ 50Mbit/s (bitrates below 4Mbit/s are reserved for almost still pictures, depending on encoding resolution and picture complexity) • Seamless bit rate change

Miscellaneous functions

• Capture and transmission of Digital Vertical Time Code. • 75% bar pattern insertion

Video buffer management

• Leak mode

Delay

• Delay from SDI encoder input to PTS value (+/- 5ms): 740ms (50Hz), 617ms (60Hz), guaranteed delay from 4 to 50Mbit/s.

Switching between 4:2:0MP@ML and 4:2:2P@ML is not seamless.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

29

1.4.2.4 - RS232 (option) Sales reference: N41SD56KAK Description: -

1200 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 baud, 1 start bit, 1 stop bit, 8 data bits, no parity, protocol: raw data is directly used to supply the TS packet payload. The DBE 4110 adjusts the adaptation field of each packet according to the number of bytes received from the data injection through RS232, - SubD9 SERIAL 1 RS232 connector.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

30

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

1.4.2.5 - Ext. Modulator C&C (option) Sales reference: N41SM0DCAK The following modulators are operated from the DBE 4110 front panel and/or from the Stand-Alone Control & Command software and/or the Fast_DSNG software:

Modulator models NTC2062 "2062ZP", "2062ZR", "2062ZQ", "2062ZK", "2062ZM", "2062ZL". NTC2080 "2080ZP", "2080ZR", "2080ZT", "2080ZQ", "2080ZK", "2080ZM", "2080ZO", "2080ZL".

up-converters

ASI input interface

NTC3631xZ "3631BZ", "3631DZ", "3631EZ", "3631FZ", "3631GZ", "3631HZ", "3631IZ", "3631KZ", "3631LZ", "3631GE", "3631AZ", "3631TB".

NTC2077Sx "2077SP", "2077SR", "2077ST", "2077SK", "2077SM", "2077SO". NTC2077Hx "2077HP", "2077HR", "2077HT", "2077HQ", "2077HK", "2077HM", "2077HO", "2077HL". NTC2077Fx "2077FM", "2077FT", "2077FO", "2077FQ", "2077FL", "2077FR".

without

NTC3359AE

without

without

Newtec modulator parameters are included in the prestored configurations in the DBE 4110 that can be recalled at a key stroke. Notes: 1. The L band output of the modulator (IFL) is for monitoring purposes only and cannot be switched off. 2. An RS485 cord is provided with the option for Control & Command between the encoder and the modulator.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

31

1.4.2.6 - DPSN board (option) Sales reference: N41HDPSNAK This board offers the composite video input. The DPSN board fits in the upper 6U slot, instead of the COMPIN board.. INPUT CHARACTERISTICS Standard

PAL BDGHI / NTSC M / SECAM (ITU-R Rec. 624)

Correction / input impedance

BNC / 75Ω

Input level (100% white bar)

1 volt peak-to-peak, nominal, with sync signal

ENCODER + DECODER CHARACTERISTICS PAL STANDARD

WITH MSU 4422 DECODER

Measurement conditions/video encoding

4:2:0 MP@ML, 14Mbit/s, 720 pixels/line, 12/3 GOP

Luminance bandwidth

0.15 to 5.5MHz ± 0.5dB (-3dB at 5.7MHz)

Luminance signal to noise ratio (grey level)

≥ 58dB

Differential gain

≤ 2%

Differential phase

≤ 2°

Luminance amplitude linearity

≤ 700 mV ±14 mV

Use of DPSN board adds approximately 20ms in 50Hz and 17ms in 60Hz. Caution: The COMPIN board is recommended for customers having PAL and NTSC signals.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

32

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

1.4.2.7 - 4 stereo audios (option) Sales reference: N41HAMUBAK

TS Out

SSEB

AMuSE Pre-multiplexer

Multiplexer

Encoder

Encoder

Encoder

Encoder

SFC

SFC

SFC

SFC

One group

One group

De-embedder

SDI IN

SDI OUT

SDI

Encoder

DAC AES/ EBU

1&2&3&4 balanced

1

ATADI board

AES/ EBU

AES/ EBU

AES/ EBU

2 3 unbalanced

4

DIGITAL AUDIO

Analogue stereo

Encoder

One group De-embedder

2 Analogue stereo

SDI IN

ANALOGUE AUDIO

SDI

DAC Analogue stereo

SFC: Sampling Frequency Converter

Figure 1.5: Audio block diagram with AMuSE and SSEB The AMuSE board features either 4 MPEG-1 audio encoders in accordance with ISO/IEC 11172-3, layer 2, 48 kHz standard or 4 AC3 packetisers. • Common features: - the AMuSE board fits in the lower 6U slot, - the DBE 4110 accepts one AMuSE board, - it is not possible to set up an AMuSE board partly in MPEG-1 encoder and partly in AC3 packetiser, - when the SDI is selected, the same group number from the four possible groups must be supplied for encoders 1 and 2. The same rule applies for encoders 3 and 4. • MPEG-1 audio encoding features: - each of the four encoders can independently receive its input from the SDI or AES/EBU. The AES/EBU input is either balanced on SubD15 (AES 3/1992, 110Ω input impedance) or unbalanced on BNC (SMPTE 276M, 75Ω input THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

-

-

33

impedance). The selection is made by the Control & Command station; all AES/EBU inputs are either balanced or unbalanced. audio de-embedding is always possible and is not dependent on the video encoder input. Audio de-embedding complies with SMPTE 272M. it supports input PCM samples at 32, 44.1 or 48kHz (SDI allows only 48kHz). before encoding, the audio stream goes through a sample rate converter. Thus, the audio stream is resampled at 48kHz and synchronised with the programme clock reference. for each audio encoder, possible rate / mode combinations are listed in the table below: Rate (kbit/s) 64

96

128

192

256

384

X

X

X

Dual Channel

X

X

X

X

Stereo

X

X

X

X

Joint Stereo

X

X

X

X

Mode Single Channel (Mono)

X

- all command running is seamless apart from audio/video compensation delay modification. - each of the four audio encoders has audio pattern generation capability (1kHz, -6dBFS signal). - when there is no video component, the MPEG-1 encoder is in “radio mode” and the delay (from SDI encoder input to PTS value, +/- 5ms) becomes equal to 150ms (50Hz and 60Hz). • AC3 packetiser features: - the AMuSE board accepts up to 4 externally encoded Dolby AC3 streams and performs PES and TS packetisation on these streams. - accepted external Dolby AC3 encoders: DP567 (AC3 stereo), DP569 (AC3 stereo and surround) - 32, 40 and 48kbit/s rates are not supported. - input data packing: professional mode 32 bit (ch1, and ch2). - external Dolby AC3 encoder sampling frequency must be set to 48kHz. - external Dolby AC3 encoder delay must be set to 179ms. - any AMuSE input can be used. If SDI input is used, the SDI input of AMuSE must be synchronous with the SDI input of SSEB. If the AES/EBU input (either balanced or unbalanced) is used, the external Dolby encoder 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

34

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

must be genlocked by the sync output of AMuSE. - AMuSE AC3 packetiser is not possible together with a video component in low or ultra low delay mode. - when there is no video component, the AC3 encoder is in “radio mode” and the delay (from external AC3 encoder to PTS value, +/- 5ms) becomes equal to 349ms (50Hz and 60Hz). - when an AC3 component is generated, a descriptor is automatically added to the PMT (descriptor private id 106).

1.4.2.8 - 2 AES/EBU interfaces (option) Sales reference: N41HATADAK

TS Out

AMuSE board

SSEB

ATADI

Multiplexer

Encoder

DAC Analogue stereo

Encoder

One group

DAC

De-embedder

Analogue stereo

2 Analogue stereo

SDI IN

ANALOGUE AUDIO

SDI

SFC

SFC

AES/ EBU

AES/ EBU

1&2 balanced

1 2 unbalanced

DIGITAL AUDIO

SFC: Sampling Frequency Converter

Figure 1.6: Audio block diagram with ATADI and SSEB The ATADI board provides AES/EBU interfaces for the two audio MPEG-1 encoders located on the SSEB board of the encoder. AES/EBU interfaces are either balanced on SubD15 (AES 3/1992,110Ω input impedance) or unbalanced on BNC (SMPTE 276M, 75Ω input impedance). The selection is made by the Control & Command station; all AES/EBU inputs are either balanced or unbalanced. THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

35

The ATADI board fits in the upper 3U slot. It supports input PCM samples at 32, 44.1 or 48 kHz. The ATADI board performs a sampling frequency conversion to 48KHz, synchronised with the programme clock reference.

1.4.2.9 - Int. modulator (option) Sales reference: N41HMODUAK The ISMB board fits in the lower 6U slot. The ISMB board is an internal modulator which takes the TS stream produced by the encoder and transforms it into a modulated form. Three modulations are available : QPSK, 8PSK, 16QAM. Output is both IF and L-band. When the ISMB is used, TS packets must be in (188+16) form. The features of ISMB board are listed in the following table:

Standards

EN 300421, EN 301210

Input

Bit rate

1.5 to 28 Mbit/s

FEC

Energy dispersal

PRBS, 24 or 32 bits

Reed Solomon Encoder

188+16 format (synchro byte included) correction capability

Interleaving

I = 12

Convolution

1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8, 8/9 Depth: K=7

Impulse response

cos (linear phase)

Roll off

26% and 35%, or Automatic (depending on modulation scheme)

Modulation

QPSK, 8PSK, 16QAM

IF output

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

36

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

Bit/Symbol ratio

2, 3 or 4

Symbol rate

0.9 to 16 MSymbol/s

Frequency (RF)

variable 70/140MHz, selectable within 50 to 180MHz range, by 125KHz step

Stability

+/- 15ppm

Level

-20dBm to +5dBm, by 0.5dB steps

Amplitude accuracy

+/- 0.2dB

Quadrature error

+/- 2°

Eye closure

5% (full Nyquist filtering)

Return loss

-23dB min.

Phase noise

-96dBc at F=100kHz

Harmonics

-45dB min.

Spurious performance (modulated carrier) in 4KHz

-55dBc/4kHz at -10dBm (ref. INTELSAT -IESS)

IF LO

Local oscillator for block-converter synchronisation

100MHz

L-Band O/P

Frequency range

0.950 to 1.750GHz by 1kHz step

Stability

+/- 50ppm

Level

variable, -20dBm to +5dBm, by 0.5dB step

An RS485 cord is provided with the ISMB board. This cord externally links the ISMB board to the encoder and is used for the control&command. This cord is the same as the one described in the section "External Modulator Control". "External Modulator Control" option is not required to operate the ISMB board.

1.4.2.10 - Alarm Relay Closure (option) Sales reference: N41HMSDLAK This function consists of two boards: the RSMAINT board and the MSDL board. In the event of a major alarm, an alarm loop (voltage free contact) is activated on the MSDL board.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

37

It is possible to activate the alarm relay either on major alarms or on major and minor alarms. The choice is made in the encoder advanced parameters in the {Technical configuration} application. ∗

RSMAINT board

This board is connected to the front of the device, behind the front panel, in the upper slot, and provides frontal access to the normal/fail switch associated with the alarm relay (MSDL board). The RSMAINT board also hosts a maintenance RS232 link (SubD9). ∗

MSDL board

This board hosts the alarm relay and the corresponding SubD9 connector giving access to the two voltage free contacts. The maximum DC voltage supported is 48V. The MSDL board also hosts the Dynamux SubD9 connector. The MSDL board fits in the lower 3U slot.

1.4.2.11 - XLR adapter cord (option) Sales reference: N41HAXLRAK This is an adapter cord with one end terminated by four XLR connectors and the other end terminated by a SubD15 connector. The cord is approximatively one metre long. It can be used with SSEB analogue audio inputs, or ATADI digital audio inputs, or AMuSE digital audio inputs.

1.4.2.12 - Source switching tolerance When the video input signal of the encoder is the result of a switch between two signals, a transient perturbation can be observed, its importance and its duration depend on the following factors: • timing relationship between the two signals, • instant of the switch (relative to beginning of a frame), • encoder video input used (SDI, composite), • encoder video processing involved. When the video input signal is the result of a switch between two signals which are synchronous (same 27MHz for both) and if the switching action is compliant with

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

38

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

SMPTE RP168 (which mainly defines line number and part of line allowed for swiching), the following table predicts the visible effect of the switch:

Time difference between switched

Video input and processing

Effects on video

signalsa SDI on SSEB/ SSEB

0 to +/- 1/2 line

image perturbation during one image

analogue on DPSN / SSEB

0 to +/- 1/2 line

image perturbation during several images

analogue on COMPIN / SSEB

0 to +/- 1/2 line

image perturbation during several images

analogue on COMPIN - (synchroniser mode) / SSEB

any

image perturbation during several images

analogue on COMPIN - (VTR mode) / SSEB

0 to +/- 9µs

image perturbation during several images

analogue on COMPIN - (VTR and synchroniser modes) / SSEB

0 to +/- 1/2 line

image perturbation during several images

a.Outside this range, there is a possibility of a black output after the switching during a few seconds.

1.4.3 - AC power supply

CHARACTERISTICS Mains voltage

100V - 230V (one range with no switching)

Mains frequency

50Hz - 60Hz

Current rating

2A - 1A

Inrush current

< 50A at 230V (cold start)

Network connection

Type A device connected by a non-industrial CEI 60320 compliant plug

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

39

CHARACTERISTICS Isolation class

I

Installation category

II

Earthing arrangement

TN, TTa

Mains fuse

T4A H250V, dimensions 5x20mm

a.For Norway and only for this country, the device can be connected to an earthing arrangement of IT type for a voltage between phases of 230V.

Other features of the power supply unit Power factor (cos Φ)

0.98

Performance factor

70% (typical on 230VAC)

Overheating protection

yesa

Overload protection

yes

Fuse

integrated

a.After overheating protection has triggered, the DBE 4110 will only re-start after OFF/ON on the power outlet switch.

1.4.4 - Mechanical characteristics • Unit width: 19”, • Unit mounting centre distance in cabinet: 467mm, • Unit height: 2U (88mm), • Unit depth (including connectors): 620mm

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

40

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

448 620 Air Inlet Air Outlet MPEG-2

DBE 4110

88

ESC

DVB

SHIFT

ENT

6.35

467 483

Figure 1.7: Dimensions

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

41

• Weight: 13.7kg in its basic version, 15.3kg in its heaviest version. The exact weight depends on the presence of the optional modules; the following tables give the exact weight of each module with the corresponding slot allocation seen from the rear panel of the equipment.

slot 0 slot 4

slot 1

slot 3

slot 2

Slot allocation

DBE 4110 chassis (without board)

10.60kg

0

SSEB board

1.87kg

1

DPSN board or COMPIN board

0.88kg 0.90kg

2

AMuSE board + 2TE (see note 1) ISMB board or 6TE 6U cache (see note 2)

1.03 + 0.18kg 1.15kg 0.17kg

3

MSDL board or 3TE 6U cache (see note 2)

0.33kg 0.08kg

4

ATADI board or 3TE 4U cache (see note 2)

0.33kg 0.06kg

In the front panel

RSMAINT board

0.06kg

Notes: 1. A 2TE cache is delivered with the 4TE AMuSE board to fill 6TE slot number 2. 2. If there is no board in a slot, a cache is set in the empty allocation.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

42

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

1.4.5 - Environmental specifications ∗

CE labelling • In compliance with the 93/68/CEE (22/07/93) directive.

∗

Safety specifications • Legislation

Complies with European Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC (73/02) amended by 93/68/EEC.

• Standards EN 60950 recommendations, 3rd edition, 2000/06, UL 60950 and CSA C22.2 N°950-095, certification file n° E226371. ∗

Electromagnetic specifications • Legislation

Complies with Directive 89/336/EEC (73/02) amended by 93/68/EEC (93/07).

• Standards EN 55022, edition 1999 for Emission, including EN 61000-3-2, EN 55024, edition 1999 for Immunity, FCC Part 15, Class A.

∗

Relative humidity: 90% max., non condensing at 40°C (in operation).

∗

Operating temperature range: 0°C to 45°C (80% R.H.max, non condensing).

∗

Storage temperature range: -10°C to 70°C.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

∗

43

Mechanical specifications: • Shock, transport category, TQC-TCE FP-M 204e level 2, • Vibrations: during operation: - vertical amplitude: - constant displacement 0.75mm peak to peak from 10 to 31Hz, - constant acceleration 1.5G (peak) from 31 to 150 Hz. - sweep rate: 1 octave per minute, - duration of 1 sweep cycle: 7.8 mn, - quantity of sweep cycles: 10, - 3 axes.

Ventilated air flow: 100m3/h (the DBE 41xx has fans for forced air cooling). The output air is hotter than the input air, about 5°C.

∗

∗

Pollution degree: 2

∗

Protection degree: IP 20

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

44

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

∗

Reliability: table of MTBF at 30° Item Power supply Alpha 400 (AC) SSEB Front panel LCD Backplane DPSN COMPIN AMuSE ATADI MSDL RSMAINT ISMB

MTBF (h) 563 000 190 000 1 940 000 6 250 000 631 000 812 000 399 000 2 940 000 9 630 000 > 20 000 000 909 000

Basic encoder without hardware options: MTBF at 30°C is 108,000h.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

45

1.4.6 - Equipment view

19” (483)

FRONT

448 20

Front Panel FAN

maintenance link

POWER SUPPLY

normal/fail switch

BACKPLANE

AIR FLOW

AIR FLOW

600

FANS

420

BOARDS

9U

connectors

MAINS BACK

Figure 1.8: DBE 4110 unit top view

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

46

Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

MPEG-2

DBE 4110

ESC

DVB

SHIFT

ENT

AUDIO IN

SDI IN

ANALOG

SERIAL 1

RS 232/485

ATADI

SSEB

LAN

10BaseT

SERIAL 2

PCR OUT

OUT 1

OUT 2

OUT 3 I

RS 485 COMPOSiTE VIDEO IN

BALANCED

TS ASI IN

GAIN FREQ ON EQ

UNBALANCED ALARM

REMOTE

MONITOR

IF LO

IF OUT

O DPSN

L BAND OUT

N

Ph T

Figure 1.9: DBE 4110 rear and front panel

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 2 - Installation

47

Chapter 2 Installation 2.1 - Encoder installation ............................................................................. 2.1.1 - Manual switch setting ..................................................................... 2.1.2 - Desktop installation......................................................................... 2.1.3 - Rack installation.............................................................................. 2.1.4 - Mains power supply and protective earth .......................................

50 50 53 53 55

2.1.4.1 - Power supply ................................................................................. 55 2.1.4.2 - Connection to the techical earth .................................................... 56 2.1.4.3 - On/Off switch ................................................................................. 56

2.2 - Board connections............................................................................... 2.2.1 - SSEB board (slot 0) ........................................................................ 2.2.2 - DPSN board (slot 1)........................................................................ 2.2.3 - COMPIN board (slot 1) ................................................................... 2.2.4 - AMUSE board (slot 2)..................................................................... 2.2.5 - ISMB board (slot 2)......................................................................... 2.2.6 - ATADI board (slot 4) ....................................................................... 2.2.7 - Alarm Relay Closure....................................................................... 2.2.8 - Modulator Control&Command ........................................................

57 58 65 66 68 73 75 77 79

2.3 - Switching on the device ...................................................................... 80 2.4 - Cable corrector in the case of a composite input ............................. 81 2.4.1 - DPSN board.................................................................................... 81 2.4.2 - COMPIN board ............................................................................... 82 2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software.......................................................... 84 2.5.1 - Scope.............................................................................................. 84 2.5.2 - Installation....................................................................................... 84 2.5.2.1 - Environment ................................................................................... 84 2.5.2.2 - Interface language for the applications .......................................... 85 2.5.2.3 - Setup procedure ............................................................................ 85

2.5.3 - Running the software...................................................................... 95 2.6 - Installing optional boards.................................................................... 97 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

48

Chapter 2 - Installation

2.6.1 - Installing a board ............................................................................ 97 2.6.2 - Removing the board ....................................................................... 98 2.7 - Installing software options.................................................................. 99

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 2

"

49

PROCEDURE

The following five steps are necessary before your encoder is ready for use: 1) Install the encoder. Installation involves the following steps: • manually set switches. • observe certain principles. • install the encoder in a rack. 2) Connect the encoder to other devices. 3) Switch on the device. 4) Adjust the cable corrector if the link exceeds 10m. 5) Install the control and command software. These various operations are described in the following sections.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

50

Chapter 2 2.1 - Encoder installation

2.1 - ENCODER INSTALLATION

The DBE 4110 encoder is designed for use in a horizontal position. The On/Off switch and the power cord should be within reach so that the device can be switched off easily.

2.1.1 - Manual switch setting " SSEB board - Set input impedance (audio)

The four switches LEFT 1, RIGHT 1, LEFT 2 and RIGHT 2 (mark 1) set incoming audio impedance. Each one comprises 2 switches which must be moved as a pair. Switch Up: high impedance

Switch Down: 600Ω impedance

The default setting is 600Ω. UP

1

Figure 2.1: SSEB board switch setting

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 2 2.1 - Encoder installation

51

" MSDL and RSMAINT boards - The different elements of alarm relay closure are shown in the following block diagram:

SSEB

MSDL

1

S1 & S2: Choice of alarm relay mode Alarm monitoring

“CLOSED”: PB

1 = Alarm

0 = relay open (normal) 1 = relay closed (alarm)

6

“OPEN”: PB 0 = relay closed (normal) 1 = relay open (alarm)

SubD9 Alarm Relay

normal (fail) N T/A switch

normal 1 (fail)

1 = on S2

Unit Fail LED on Encoder front panel

RSMAINT

Figure 2.2: Alarm relay closure diagram

• Enabling/Disabling the alarm relay In the event of a prompt alarm from the main processing board, a contact dry loop is activated on the MSDL board. The S2 switch (RSMAINT board) disables the alarm relay. The red LED (UNIT FAIL) comes on on the front panel of the device to signal the presence of a prompt alarm (regardless of S2 setting). Note: Do not forget to set the S2 switch from "Test/Alarm" back to "Normal" once the fault has been corrected.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

52

Chapter 2 2.1 - Encoder installation

• Choice of alarm relay mode In a system configuration with several DBE 41xx devices, the user can choose to interconnect the dry contacts of the alarm relays in series or parallel. The setting of the two microswitches on the MSDL board determines either open or closed contact mode: - choosing “open contact” for the alarm relay, associated with an unacknowledged fault means that all dry loop contacts must be set in series, - choosing “closed contact” for the alarm relay, associated with an unacknowledged fault means that all dry loop contacts must be set in parallel.

Micro-switch on MSDL board

open: PB

Fault

closed: PB

no

yes

no

yes

Switch S2 (N-T/A) on RSMAINT board

left (N)

right (T/A)

left (N)

right (T/A)

left (N)

right (T/A)

left (N)

right (T/A)

Comment

no comment

loop test

unack. fault

ack. fault

no comment

loop test

unack. fault

ack. fault

Contact status

closed

open

open

closed

open

closed

closed

open

Red "UNIT FAIL" LED

off

on

on

on

off

on

on

on

Note: The dry contact always signals an operating fault, including a power failure and device shutdown.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 2 2.1 - Encoder installation

53

2.1.2 - Desktop installation The DBE 4110 encoder is fitted with four small plastic feet to ensure a minimum space of 1cm is guaranteed between the power supply of the encoder and the desktop for safety reasons.

2.1.3 - Rack installation Principles " " " " " " "

Prevent outgoing hot air being reinjected into other devices. Ensure an equal and acceptable air flow to the air-capture points of all devices. Avoid the effects due to natural convection between devices. Avoid short-cuts between hot and cold air and vice versa. Avoid transversal effects with connected racks. Avoid thermal pockets (obstruction of hot air). Check the air flow rate that will be used.

If the encoder is installed in a rack, the plastic feet can be removed. The device should be mounted on L-profiles in the rack. These should be low profile to ensure adequate air flow (see Figure 2.3). Note: The DBE 4110 encoder does not feature air filters. If used in a dusty environment, a filtered rack should be used.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

54

Chapter 2 2.1 - Encoder installation

The various types of L-profile are shown below: 1) Standard L-profiles 2U

Encoder front panel

1U 2U

Encoder front panel

1U 2U

Encoder front panel

1U

2) Special L-profiles Encoder front panel Encoder front panel

Front view

Side view 2cm 4cm

4cm

V

V

4cm

5mm

4cm

D D = depends on rack

3) Widened L-profiles 2cm min. 4cm max.

Encoder front panel

Figure 2.3: Possible installation types

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 2 2.1 - Encoder installation

55

2.1.4 - Mains power supply and protective earth 2.1.4.1 - Power supply " 100 - 230V AC Mains Power

• Connector

On/Off switch fuse holder mains connector

Figure 2.4: Mains power connector

• Fuse Fuse characteristics: T4AH250V, dimensions 5 x 20mm, can be accessed from the power connector. Important: For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only with same type and rating of fuse.

• Mains power supply cable The mains cable is not supplied with the device. You are advised to use a mains cable with the following features: • Device end of cable: CEI320 compliant connector, • Wire: 3x1mm2 or 18 AWG section, 10A minimum compliant with the applicable standard or rules of the country where the device is installed, • Mains outlet end of cable: plug compliant with the applicable standard or rules of the country where the device is installed.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

56

Chapter 2 2.1 - Encoder installation

• Mains supplies connecting The equipment is pluggable type A. The building installation must feature overload and earth fault protection and a bipolar cut-off device or a differential circuit break. The connection panel should comply with the legislation in force in the country of installation. Connection panel position in the rack must ensure that plug and power cord are within easy reach for switching off purposes. Ensure that the device is connected correctly. If you are in any doubt, consult a qualified electrician.

2.1.4.2 - Connection to the techical earth The pin to the right of the connector is used to ground the device to ensure equipotential grounding between the different devices in the technical centre

2.1.4.3 - On/Off switch While the encoder is not connected to other devices, keep the On/Off switch set to Off.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 2 2.2 - Board connections

57

2.2 - BOARD CONNECTIONS

Once the encoder itself has been installed, the boards need to be connected. The DBE 4110 device has five slots of 402mm depth: - 2 x 6 U slots - 2 x 3 U slots - 1 x 9 U slot.

Slot 0 (9U 5TE) Slot 4 (3U 4TE)

Slot 1 (6U 4TE)

Slot 3 (3U 6TE)

Slot 2 (6U 6TE)

DBE 4110 SSEB (standard) ATADI (option)

COMPIN or DPSN (option)

Alarm Relay Closure (option)

AMuSE (option) or ISMB (option)

Figure 2.5: DBE 4110 encoder rear panel

Note: You are strongly recommended not to leave empty slots without blank panels as ventilation could be impaired.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

58

Chapter 2 2.2 - Board connections

2.2.1 - SSEB board (slot 0)

SSEB board

1

2

Connector IN # AUDIO ANALOGUE

3

4

5

6

7

8

Description 2 stereo audio / 2 double mono inputs are available on a 15-pin female Sub-D connector. Characteristics: • Balanced signal, • Female Sub-D connector, Contact

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Signal

L1 GNDL1 R1 GNDR1 L2 GNDL2 R2 GNDR2

Contact

Signal

9 10 11 12 13 14 15

/L1 GND /R1 GND /L2 GND /R2

• Input impedance: 600Ω / 18kΩ (manual switching on the board), • Inputs without transformer. The DBE 4110 is provided with a SubD - 4 XLR adapter cord. Each channel is assigned an XLR connector, as described in the following table. XLR colour brown red

Channel Left channel 1 (L1, /L1, GNDL1) Right channel 1 (R1, /R1, GNDR1)

orange

Left channel 2 (L2, /L2, GNDL2)

yellow

Right channel 2 (R2, /R2, GNDR2)

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 2 2.2 - Board connections

59

SSEB board

1

$ SDI IN

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

The "SDI input" connector receives a 270Mbit/s SDI signal in serial format (625 and 525 lines). Characteristics: • Female BNC coaxial connector, • Impedance: 75Ω. Use a FILOTEX KX6-A type cable or equivalent assembled with a 75Ω male BNC connector from RADIALL (ref.: R142085000) or equivalent. Cable length is 0-200m.

1 % SERIAL RS232/485

The "SERIAL 1 RS232/485 syn./async. private data" connector is used to inject low flow digital data into the DBE 4110. Characteristics in RS232 asynchronous mode: • Female 9-pin Sub-D connector, Signal Contact

TX CK TX RX RX CK GND

1 2 3 4 5

Contact Signal

6 7 8 9

/TX CK /TX /RX /RX CK

For RS232 asynchronous mode, only pins 2, 3 & 5 are used. For other modes, contact NEXTREAM.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

60

Chapter 2 2.2 - Board connections

SSEB board

1

& LAN 10BaseT

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Depending on the type of the SSEB board, the LEDs have different signalling (see below). To know the board type installed in the equipment, select the OTHER/Tools/About/Information command on the device front panel. The board type (HWD 1,2 or 4) is given on the third line. The Ethernet link is dedicated to device supervision. This link is also used for injecting ECMs and low bitrate data (64 kb/s).

N K LI

Tx

Rx

Characteristics: • 10BaseT connector according to IEEE 802.3 standard, • Rated transmission bitrate: 10Mb/s, • Maximum cable length: 10 metres (unshielded twisted pairs), • 3 LEDs to indicate link operation.

Ethernet LEDs, HWD 4 type

Rx = Rx frames received by the device Tx = Tx frames sent by the device LINK = link on (carrier detected).

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 2 2.2 - Board connections

61

SSEB board

3

4

5

6

7

8

Or

TR

A FF

& LAN 10BaseT

2

IC PO LA RI TY LI N K

1

Ethernet LEDs, HWD 1 or 2 type

TRAFFIC ON= Rx and/or Tx frames exchanged POLARITY ON= Rx pair polarity correct LINK = link level set (test pulses exchanged with partner)). Cables used: For a direct connection to an operating station, use a cross cable to link the Tx pairs of the Encoder’s RJ45 connector to the Rx pairs of the PC’s RJ45 connector. The cable delivered with the device is a cross cable. DBE 4110

Ethernet 10BaseT cross cable

PC

For connection to a hub, you are generally advised to use a straight (point to point) cable as crossing often occurs in the HUB which then bears the X symbol. Please refer to the Hub User Manual. DBE 4110

PC

47232437AK01 June 2003

Ethernet 10BaseT straight cable

Ethernet 10BaseT straight cable

HUB x

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

62

Chapter 2 2.2 - Board connections

SSEB board

1 2 ' SERIAL RS485

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

The RS485 9-pin Sub-D connector marked “SERIAL 2 RS485” is used to control the Newtec modulator. Characteristics: • Female 9-pin Sub-D connector, Signal Contact

reserved 1

Contact Signal

2 3 reserved 4 reserved 5 RX TX

6 reserved 7 /RX 8 /TX 9 reserved

• Asynchronous RS485, • Maximum transmission rate: 38400 bauds. For other uses, contact NEXTREAM.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 2 2.2 - Board connections

63

SSEB board

1

( PCR OUT

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Characteristics: SubD 9 connector Signal Contact

DATA 1 2 CK WIN 3 GND

Contact Signal

6 7 8

/DATA /CK /WIN

5

The PCR is computed on 42 bits, at a 27MHz frequency. The 33 msb (most significant bits) are the base and the 9 lsb (least significant bits) the extension. The "PCR out" connector only sends the 33 msb. PCR recurrence is 26.5 hours. 1

76

34

CLOCK 6.75 MHz PCR WIN SERIAL PCR base

33 bits PCR base

42 undefined bits

CLOCK PCR WIN SERIAL B32 B31 B30 B29 B28 B27 PCR base

B1 B0

Zoom

) TS ASI IN

Zoom

This connector accepts a signal in TS serial format (ASI mode). Characteristics: • Female BNC coaxial connector, • Impedance: 75Ω. Use a FILOTEX KX6-A type cable or equivalent assembled with a 75Ω male BNC connector from RADIALL (ref.: R142085000) or equivalent.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

64

Chapter 2 2.2 - Board connections

SSEB board

1

2

* TS ASI OUT

3

4

5

6

7

8

Three connectors deliver a signal in TS serial format (ASI mode).

Characteristics: • Female BNC coaxial connector, • Impedance: 75Ω. Use a FILOTEX KX6-A type cable or equivalent assembled with a 75Ω male BNC connector from RADIALL (ref.: R142085000) or equivalent.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 2 2.2 - Board connections

65

2.2.2 - DPSN board (slot 1)

DPSN board

1 Connector

# COMPOSITE VIDEO IN

2

3

Description The "composite video input" connector receives an analogue composite video input signal. Characteristics: • Female BNC coaxial connector, • Impedance: 75Ω. Use a FILOTEX KX6-A type cable or equivalent assembled with a 75Ω male BNC connector from RADIALL (ref.: R142085000) or equivalent.

$ GAIN, FREQ and ON

% MONITOR

See section 2.4 - Cable corrector in the case of a composite input for information on using the GAIN and FREQ potentiometers and the meaning of the "ON" LED. The MONITOR output is used for adjusting cable correction, particularly in the case of links exceeding 10 m. Characteristics: • Female BNC coaxial connector, • Impedance: 75Ω. Use a FILOTEX KX6-A type cable or equivalent assembled with a 75Ω male BNC connector from RADIALL (ref.: R142085000) or equivalent.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

66

Chapter 2 2.2 - Board connections

2.2.3 - COMPIN board (slot 1)

COMPIN board

1 Connector

# COMPOSITE VIDEO IN

2

3

4

Description The "composite video input" connector receives an analogue composite video input signal. Characteristics: • Female BNC coaxial connector, • Impedance: 75Ω. Use a FILOTEX KX6-A type cable or equivalent assembled with a 75Ω male BNC connector from RADIALL (ref.: R142085000) or equivalent.

$ GAIN, FREQ and EQ

% MON OUT

See section 2.4 - Cable corrector in the case of a composite input for information on using the GAIN and FREQ potentiometers and the meaning of the "EQ" LED. The MONITOR output is used for adjusting cable correction, particularly in the case of links exceeding 10 m, or for monitoring purposes. The MONITOR output is not suitable for measurements on the signal. Characteristics: • Female BNC coaxial connector, • Impedance: 75Ω.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 2 2.2 - Board connections

67

COMPIN board

1

& REF IN

2

3

4

The REF IN connector can receive either a composite video input signal or a black burst to allow video input stream synchronisation. If the board is in synchroniser mode, but without any REF IN signal, then the board synchronises the video input stream with an internal reference. Characteristics: • Female BNC coaxial connector, • Impedance: 75Ω. Use a FILOTEX KX6-A type cable or equivalent assembled with a 75Ω male BNC connector from RADIALL (ref.: R142085000) or equivalent.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

68

Chapter 2 2.2 - Board connections

2.2.4 - AMUSE board (slot 2)

AMuSE board

1

Connector

# SDI IN

2

3

4

5

6

Description The SDI 270 Mbit/s serial input features up to eight embedded stereo audio channels. This interface has the following features: • SDI compliant with SMPTE 259M (4:2:2 Component part), • Embedding compliant with SMPTE 272M. Characteristics: • Female BNC coaxial connector, • Impedance: 75Ω. Use a FILOTEX KX6-A type cable or equivalent assembled with a 75Ω male BNC connector from RADIALL (ref.: R142085000) or equivalent.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 2 2.2 - Board connections

69

AMuSE board

1

# SDI OUT

2

4

3

5

6

Description: The AMuSE board duplicates the incoming SDI signal to supply the SSEB board, thereby avoiding the need for an external distribution amplifier.

DBE 41xx Up to 4 AES3 SDI in

Optional AMuSE board

on Backplane

SDI loop through SSEB board TS Out

"SDI OUT" is an active loop-through of the SDI input, after signal reshaping. This copy is used, either to monitor the input, or to cascade the AMuSE board with a video compression board (SSEB). For these 2 applications you do not require a long cable. "SDI out" is compliant with the 259M SMPTE standard, for a maximum cable length of 50 metres. Characteristics: • Female BNC coaxial connector, • Impedance: 75Ω. Use a FILOTEX KX6-A type cable or equivalent assembled with a 75Ω male BNC connector from RADIALL (ref.: R142085000) or equivalent.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

70

Chapter 2 2.2 - Board connections

AMuSE board

1

DIN $ AUD Bal

2

4

3

5

6

The digital audio inputs are an alternative solution to SDI embedded audio. Description: Two sets of connectors/standards are available to the user: SubD15 and AES IN 1 to 4. Characteristics: • balanced: a specific cable is provided with the board. This cable links the SubD15 connector to 4 XLR female connectors (110Ω, balanced). Contact Signal

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

IN1+ ShieldIN1 IN2+ ShieldIN2 IN3+ ShieldIN3 IN4+ ShieldIN4

Contact Signal

9 10 11 12 13 14 15

IN1GND IN2GND IN3GND IN4-

Each XLR has its own colour, as described in the following table:

DIN % AUD Unbal

XLR colour

Channels

brown

Digital stereo (IN1-, IN1+, ShieldIN1)

red

Digital stereo (IN2-, IN2+, ShieldIN2)

orange

Digital stereo (IN3-, IN3+, ShieldIN3)

yellow

Digital stereo (IN4-, IN4+, ShieldIN4)

• unbalanced: four BNC female connectors, compliant with SMPTE 276M (75Ω, 1V unbalanced).

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 2 2.2 - Board connections

71

AMuSE board

1

& CTRL OUT

2

4

3

6

5

Description: This interface is reserved for controlling and monitoring an external audio encoder, a Dolby AC-3 Multichannel Encoder (DP569).

DBE 4110 Encoder

ctrl/cmd

Up to 3 AES3

Dolby AC-3 Surround encoder DP569

Backplane AMuSE board

Gen lock IEC1937 in AES3

TS out

SSEB board

Ethernet

ctrl + clk TS output

Characteristics: • SubD9 female connector, asynchronous, RS 485. Signal Contact

GND RXTX+ GND NC

47232437AK01 June 2003

1 2 3 4 5

Contact Signal

6 7 8 9

GND RX+ TXGND

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

72

Chapter 2 2.2 - Board connections

AMuSE board

1

' REF OUT

2

3

4

5

6

Description: This interface is used to synchronise an external audio encoder. It allows the external Dolby AC-3 encoder to be locked onto the video clock. Characteristics: • generates muted PCM samples at 48 kHz, and locked onto the video clock of the associated SSEB board, • Female BNC coaxial connector, compliant with SMPTE 276M (75Ω, 1V, unbalanced).

( LED

Not relevant

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 2 2.2 - Board connections

73

2.2.5 - ISMB board (slot 2)

ISMB board

Connector

# REMOTE

REMOTE

IF LO

IF OUT

L BAND OUT

1

2

3

4

Description The "REMOTE" RS485 connector is used for the control and command link.

Characteristics: Female Sub-D 9-pin connector:

Signal Contact

/RX /TX GND

1 2 3 4 5

Contact Signal

6 7 8 9

TX

RX

The cable is delivered with the device. Pay attention to the direction of this cable.

$ IF LO

47232437AK01 June 2003

Characteristics: • Female BNC coaxial connector, • Impedance: 75Ω., • Frequency : 100MHz.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

74

Chapter 2 2.2 - Board connections

ISMB board REMOTE

IF LO

IF OUT

L BAND OUT

1

2

3

4

% IF OUT

Characteristics: • Female BNC coaxial connector, • Impedance: 75Ω.

BAND & LOUT

Characteristics: • Female BNC coaxial connector, • Impedance: 75Ω.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 2 2.2 - Board connections

75

2.2.6 - ATADI board (slot 4)

ATADI board

2

1 Connector

# AES IN

Description Two digital audios can be input on the ATADI board, either on a SubD (balanced) or on XLR connectors (unbalanced). The choice between BNC and XLR is user-programmable for each audio.

Description: This connector accepts the two digital audio inputs in balanced form. A specific cable is shipped with the board. This cable links the SubD15 connector to 4 XLR female connectors (the same type of cable as for the AMuSE board or the SSEB board) but only two XLR connectors are used. Characteristics: • Female SubD15 connector, Contact Signal

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

IN1+ IN1G IN2+ IN2G NC GND NC GND

Contact Signal

9 10 11 12 13 14 15

IN1GND IN2GND NC GND NC

• Impedance: 110 Ω, • Balanced. Each XLR has its own colour, as described in the following table.

47232437AK01 June 2003

XLR colour

Channel

brown

Digital stereo (IN1-, IN1+, IN1GND)

red

Digital stereo (IN2-, IN2+, IN2GND) THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

76

Chapter 2 2.2 - Board connections

ATADI board

1

$ AES IN

2

Description: These connectors accept the two digital audio inputs in unbalanced form. Characteristics: • two 75Ω female BNC connectors, • compliant with SMPTE 276 M standard (75Ω, 1V unbalanced). Left BNC input is linked to SSEB audio encoder no. 1. Right BNC input is linked to SSEB audio encoder no. 2. Use a FILOTEX KX6-A type cable or equivalent assembled with a 75Ω male BNC connector from RADIALL (ref.: R142085000) or equivalent.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 2 2.2 - Board connections

77

2.2.7 - Alarm Relay Closure This function is implemented by two boards:

RSMAINT board

# $ ALARM % RESET & RS232

47232437AK01 June 2003

2

3

6

9

1

Connector

1

5

0

4

Description Coding wheel (should be set to 0 for normal operation) N - T/A switch (N: normal, T/A: test-acknowledgement) RESET pushbutton (reserved for maintenance) Male SubD 9 connector (reserved for maintenance)

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

78

Chapter 2 2.2 - Board connections

ALARM (MSDL) board (slot 3)

2

1

# STATISTICAL

SubD 9 connector (for DBE 4130 only)

MULTIPLEXING

$ ALARM

Alarm output for remoting prompt alarms. In a system configuration, the alarm outputs of the different devices can be grouped by paralleling the contacts which are normally open (i.e. when there are no prompt alarms) or serialising the normally closed contacts. The configuration of the "normally open" or "normally closed" contacts depends on the setting of two switches on the alarm board.

Characteristics: SubD 9 connector

Signal Contact

DL1 NC NC NC NC

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

1 2 3 4 5

Contact Signal

6 7 8 9

DL2 NC NC NC

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 2 2.2 - Board connections

79

2.2.8 - Modulator Control&Command A 0.5m length cable is supplied with this option, N41SM0DCAH. The two ends of the cable are different. The labels on the cable show which end should be connected to the encoder and which to the modulator. The cable features 110Ω termination resistance.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

80

Chapter 2 2.3 - Switching on the device

2.3 - SWITCHING ON THE DEVICE

Ensure that the device is properly grounded before power-up. On the rear panel, connect the power cable and turn the power switch to ON. When the device is switched on, check that the green "POWER" LED on the front panel is on. If not, refer to the "Troubleshooting" chapter. When switched on, the device runs an autotest after which the main screen is displayed (see Welcome and main screens page 108). Caution: • When the DBE 4110 encoder is first switched on, the non volatile RAM is initialised with a configuration not defining any service. It is necessary to create or recall a service. Refer to the "PC operation - Control & Command software" chapter. • When the device is switched on, the last active configuration is loaded.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 2 2.4 - Cable corrector in the case of a composite input

81

2.4 - CABLE CORRECTOR IN THE CASE OF A COMPOSITE INPUT

The cable corrector is useful for links exceeding 10m.

2.4.1 - DPSN board Switch SE1 (in the figure of the DPSN board below) is used to adjust the FREQ. and GAIN potentiometers for cable correction. When the settings are active, the green "ON" LED is on and the bandwidth and the gain can be adjusted.

To adjust the cable corrector: • switch off the device, • extract the board - on extraction and insertion of the board, check that the metal joints that ensure electromagnetic continuity are correctly positioned, • set the SE1 switch to 1 - in setting 2 (factory setting), the SE1 switch deactivates the cable corrector, • insert the board, • inject a multiburst signal, through the cable to be equalised, at the composite video input, • connect a monitor to the MONITOR access on the board, • increase signal amplitude to the required level with the GAIN setting, • adjust the bandwidth of the cable corrector with the FREQ. setting.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

Chapter 2 2.4 - Cable corrector in the case of a composite input

J2

J1

S11 S10 L600

J3 H1

MA520

MA500

MA19 C191

F520

R717

C190

MA18 Q640

C695TP687 TP685 MN53 MA21 TP684

C691

SE680

TP680 TP681

MN4

MN46 MN52

C282

MX1

MN32

MN40

MN14

MN50 MN18

MN41 MN31

S3

S2

TP8

MN28 S5 S4

MN30 C693

MONITOR

TP15 MA30

K TP14

MN15

MA7

MN23 DS150

C83

L540

TP4

MN6 F540

TP3

R141

MN21

MA35

540

L280 R73C286

MN19

R71

MN43

C176

L3

R248

MA22

MN20

MA28 L630

MN8

R192

C125

C114 C113 C120 C119

FL101 MN37

L4

L6

TP641 TP640 MN22 TP642

L2

SE71

MA12

L1

R620

FL100 C93R77 C647 MA8 MN27 C118

C111

MN33

MA37

S13 MA34

CR110

MA11

TP100

C627R164

C626 R146

C624

R622

C631 MA10 C628 MA16 C630

TP9

MN26

MN25

C629

TP620

MA13 MA14 C625

ON

TP682 TP683

MN24

MN51

FL2

FREQ

C520

MN5

C621 MA15

P1

17

TP686 MN2

GAIN

11 14

C523

R700 R709

C500 L520

FL1

C620

P1_2

L500

H3

C503

MA36

R644

Q641

C702

R703

C642 R648 C641

TP2

R649

11 23 23

SE1

L170

P1_1

TP10

R642 R640

MA33

SE1

Q180 C172 R180

TP20 DS1 K

C612 C603 C613 R24 MA31 L25 C643 C173 R173

MA2

C609

C611

J4 TP11 C617 C616 C606 C605 MA32 C600 R609 R604 TP600 R610 MA17 MA20

DS2 K

R182 R184

C615 C614

MA1

R7 C7 R5

C607 DS4 K

F500

82

Figure 2.6: Part of DPSN board

2.4.2 - COMPIN board Switches S1 and S3 (in the figure of the COMPIN board below) are used to adjust the FREQ. and GAIN potentiometers for cable correction. When the settings are active, the green “EQ” LED is on and the bandwidth and the gain can be adjusted.

To adjust the cable corrector: • switch off the device, • extract the board - on extraction and insertion of the board, check that the metal joints that ensure electromagnetic continuity are correctly positioned, • set S1 and S3 switches together towards the MONITOR connector - set S1 and S3 switches together towards the Composite video IN connector (factory setting), the switches deactivate the cable corrector, • insert the board, THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 2 2.4 - Cable corrector in the case of a composite input

83

• inject a multiburst signal, through the cable to be equalised, at the composite video input, • connect a monitor to the MONITOR access on the board, • increase signal amplitude to the required level with the GAIN setting, • adjust the bandwidth of the cable corrector with the FREQ. setting.

S1/S3

FREQ EQ GAIN MONITOR

Figure 2.7: Part of COMPIN board

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

84

Chapter 2 2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software

2.5 - INSTALLING STAND-ALONE SOFTWARE

2.5.1 - Scope The stand-alone software supplied with the encoder is designed to control a single encoder. The stand-alone software comprises a set of basic applications for declaring, configuring and supervising the encoder.

2.5.2 - Installation 2.5.2.1 - Environment The software runs with Windows NT4.0 and Windows 2000 operating systems. To run the {Alarm Help} and {Event Log} applications, the "Interbase 6" database manager must be installed. This manager is included in the "Stand-Alone" software and can be installed when the "Stand-Alone" software itself is first installed. Note: with WINDOWS NT or WINDOWS 2000 operating systems, "Administrator" rights are needed to install the database manager.

Minimum requirements for the PC designated to support the software are: • • • • • •

300 MHz Pentium II© microprocessor, WINDOWS NT™ version 4 or WINDOWS 2000 operating system, ETHERNET© board, TCP/IP command interface (MicroSoft TCP/IP-32©), mouse, colour monitor with 17" screen, SVGA resolution (800 x 600).

Note: release 7.0 of the software requires a system library (comctl32.dll) which may not be up-to-date on certain Windows NT 4.0 versions (in particular on service pack 3 with Internet Explorer 3). The software installation program tests the version number of this library and offers to

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 2 2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software

85

install a Microsoft patch to correct the problem. "Administrator" rights and a PC reboot are needed to install this patch.

2.5.2.2 - Interface language for the applications The interface language of the {Alarm Help} application corresponds to the one chosen in the Windows Control Panel (Regional Settings WinNT or Regional Options Win2000) before installation, i.e. French for French-speaking countries and English for the others. For the other applications, French and English will be installed systematically and the required language can be chosen using the Regional Settings application in the Windows Control Panel.

Figure 2.8: Regional Settings (WinNT) or Regional Options (Win 2000)

2.5.2.3 - Setup procedure The software is supplied on CD-ROM. 1. Insert the CD-ROM in the PC drive. 2. Double-click on the Setup.exe file in the Stand-Alone/Disk1 directory to begin installing the software. The Wizard is then loaded to help you install the 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

86

Chapter 2 2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software

software.

Figure 2.9: Loading the Wizard 3. If release 7.0 of the "Stand-Alone" software is being installed on the PC for the first time and the user rights are not "Administator", the following window is displayed:

Clicking on OK displays the following dialogue box.

Clicking on OK displays Figure 2.22: "Stand-Alone" software setup complete. The software has not been installed. 4. If release 7.0 of the "Stand-Alone" software has already been installed or the PC user rights are "Administrator", the first dialogue box displayed is used to select a software installation directory. A default directory is proposed.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 2 2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software

87

Figure 2.10: Default directory 5. To choose another directory, click on Browse and indicate the directory and the path (e.g., c:\dvb\dbs2930v6.5\V65program).

Figure 2.11: Changing directories

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

88

Chapter 2 2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software

6. If the directory does not already exist, confirm whether or not you want it to be created.

Figure 2.12: Creating a new directory

Figure 2.13: New directory 7. Click on Next>. 8. The following dialogue box is used to validate DBS 2930 software options. This dialogue box is not used in Stand-Alone mode.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 2 2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software

89

Figure 2.14: Validating DBS 2930 options 9. Do not fill in this window and click on Next. 10.A new dialogue box is displayed. It is used to rename the directory in the Program Folder which contains the icons representing the various software applications. Both the icons and this directory are automatically generated during the software setup phase.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

90

Chapter 2 2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software

Figure 2.15: Icon directory 11.Click on Next>. Setup is run (file loading and icon creation).

Figure 2.16: Running setup 12.When setup is complete and if the database manager has already been installed, Figure 2.22: "Stand-Alone" software setup complete is displayed. If version 7.0 of the software is being installed on the PC for the first time, the THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 2 2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software

91

"Interbase" database manager installation initialisation window is displayed.

Figure 2.17: Initialising database manager installation The following window is then displayed:

Figure 2.18: Database manager welcome screen 13.Click on Next to display the database manager user licence agreement screen.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

92

Chapter 2 2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software

Figure 2.19: Licence agreement 14.Read the contents of the licence and click on I Agree to begin installing the manager.

Figure 2.20: Installing the database manager The following window is displayed to show that setup is complete:

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 2 2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software

93

Figure 2.21: Database manager setup complete 15.Click on Finish to display the "Stand-Alone" software setup complete window.

Figure 2.22: "Stand-Alone" software setup complete 16.Click on Finish to exit "Stand-Alone" software setup.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

94

Chapter 2 2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software

Figure 2.23: Installation directory contents

Figure 2.24: Software application icons

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 2 2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software

95

2.5.3 - Running the software After running WINDOWS on the operating PC and opening the directory containing the software applications, the following panel is displayed:

Figure 2.25: Icon display The icons represent the “Stand-Alone” software applications. The following order must be observed when running the software: 1. Open a session by double-clicking on the Equipment Interface icon to run the {Equipment Interface} application. Notes: 1. To shut down a session, it is advisable to close this application after all the others, otherwise a "Some Applications are still connected; Do you really want to quit anyway?" warning message will ask you to confirm application shut down. 2. It is advisable to leave this application open when the device is being used, even if no other application is run.

2. Declare the device from the {Equipment Installation} application. This step is unnecessary if the device has already been declared in a previous session. 3. Set the technical configuration of the device from the {Technical Configuration} application. This step is unnecessary if the device has already been set in a previous session. 4. Run the {Monitoring & Redundancy} application to monitor the device. 5. The {Event Log} application is used to view events occurring on the Encoder (alarms, reboot, etc.). 6. The {Alarm Help} application explains the meaning of alarms displayed in

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

96

Chapter 2 2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software

the {Monitoring & Redundancy} application. Notes: 1. The {Download Embedded Software} application is used by NEXTREAM to download embedded software. 2. The {ATM Connect Management} application does not concern the DBE 4130 Encoder/ADSL SuperEncoder.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 2 2.6 - Installing optional boards

97

2.6 - INSTALLING OPTIONAL BOARDS

2.6.1 - Installing a board

SSEB (standard) ATADI (option)

COMPIN or DPSN (option)

Alarm Relay Closure (option)

AMuSE or ISMB (option) + blank panel, see note

Figure 2.26: DBE 4110 rear panel

• Switch off the device. • Remove the blank panel. • Carefully slide in the board whilst keeping the extractors open. • When the board is nearly all the way in, start closing the extractors by pushing them towards the centre of the board. Check that the metal joins that ensure electromagnetic continuity are correctly positioned and that the centring pins are aligned with the centring holes. Press gently to engage the connectors. • When the board is completely inserted, secure it with the screws. • Switch the device on. • To change the hardware configuration, switch to "local" mode in the OTHER/Tools/Control menu on the front panel. • Declare the board via the DBE 4110’s front panel ("OTHER/Tools/Option/Hardware" menu). • Reboot the device. Note: A 2TE blank panel is delivered with the 4TE AMuSE board to fill 6TE slot 2.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

98

Chapter 2 2.6 - Installing optional boards

2.6.2 - Removing the board • Switch off the device. • Follow the installation procedure in reverse order. • Undeclare the board via the DBE 4110’s front panel. Note: A blank panel must be set in the empty slot.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 2 2.7 - Installing software options

99

2.7 - INSTALLING SOFTWARE OPTIONS

If the options are delivered with the device, they are directly available for the operator without operation. If you order the options after device purchase, please follow the procedure below: • When you order an option, please supply your device code (see section 3.8.9.3.6 - OTHER / Tools / About screen page 146), • NEXTREAM will return you a special 6-digit key (which is unique and can only be used for one device) and a sticker to stick on the device, • To install the option, enter this key (see section 3.8.9.3.5 - OTHER / Tools / Option screen page 143). Note: It is necessary to close and open the {Technical Configuration} application when a new software option is installed.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

100

Chapter 2 2.7 - Installing software options

BLANK PAGE

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 3 - Front Panel Operation

101

Chapter 3 Front Panel Operation 3.1 - Operating principle ............................................................................ 103 3.2 - Front panel overview ......................................................................... 104 3.3 - Welcome and main screens .............................................................. 108 3.4 - Ergonomy............................................................................................ 110 3.4.1 - Operating mode ............................................................................ 110 3.4.2 - Changing parameters ON AIR...................................................... 112 3.5 - External modulator connection ........................................................ 113 3.6 - Menu tree ............................................................................................ 114 3.7 - Sections associated with the menu.................................................. 117 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens........................... 3.8.1 - Main screen .................................................................................. 3.8.2 - TRANSMIT screen........................................................................ 3.8.3 - PRESET screen............................................................................

118 118 119 120

3.8.3.1 - PRESET / Recall screen .............................................................. 120 3.8.3.2 - PRESET / Store screen ............................................................... 122 3.8.3.3 - PRESET / Erase screen .............................................................. 123

3.8.4 - MOD.SETUP screen..................................................................... 124 3.8.4.1 - MOD.SETUP / Tx O/P screen...................................................... 3.8.4.2 - MOD.SETUP / If screen ............................................................... 3.8.4.3 - MOD.SETUP / L-Band screen ..................................................... 3.8.4.4 - MOD.SETUP / Convolution screen .............................................. 3.8.4.5 - MOD.SETUP / Symbol_R screen ................................................ 3.8.4.6 - MOD.SETUP / Info/Bandwidth screen ......................................... 3.8.4.7 - MOD.SETUP / Roll_off screen..................................................... 3.8.4.8 - MOD.SETUP / Spectrum screen .................................................

124 125 126 127 127 128 129 130

3.8.5 - ENC.O/P screen ........................................................................... 130 3.8.6 - ENCODING screen....................................................................... 131 3.8.6.1 - ENCODING / Video screen.......................................................... 131

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

102

Chapter 3 - Front Panel Operation

3.8.6.2 - ENCODING / Audio screen .......................................................... 133 3.8.6.3 - ENCODING / Data screen............................................................ 134

3.8.7 - SCRAMBLING screen .................................................................. 135 3.8.8 - ALARM screen ............................................................................. 136 3.8.9 - OTHER screen ............................................................................. 137 3.8.9.1 - OTHER / Setup screen................................................................. 137 3.8.9.2 - OTHER / Monitor screen .............................................................. 138 3.8.9.2.1 - OTHER / Monitor / Output screen ............................................... 138 3.8.9.2.2 - OTHER / Monitor / Input screen .................................................. 139

3.8.9.3 - OTHER / Tools screen ................................................................. 141 3.8.9.3.1 - OTHER / Tools / Control screen.................................................. 3.8.9.3.2 - OTHER / Tools / IP Address screen............................................ 3.8.9.3.4 - OTHER / Tools / Reboot screen.................................................. 3.8.9.3.5 - OTHER / Tools / Option screen................................................... 3.8.9.3.6 - OTHER / Tools / About screen.................................................... 3.8.9.3.7 - OTHER / Tools / Time screen .....................................................

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

141 141 143 143 146 148

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 3 3.1 - Operating principle

103

3.1 - OPERATING PRINCIPLE

In stand-alone configuration, supervision is carried out from the front panel (described in this chapter) and from a PC terminal connected to the DBE 4110 by an Ethernet link and equipped with "Stand-alone" software supplied with the equipment (described in the following chapter) or Fast DSNG software (described in the chapter immediately afterwards). Front panel operation is designed to take into consideration the operating conditions of DSNG operators (Service Providers using the device for straightforward event coverage or the more complex occasional links). The following sections describe the control / command menu tree of the DSNG DBE 4110 encoder. Caution: When a parameter is changed by the supervision applications, the front panel display is not updated, it is necessary to validate the parameters.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSOM DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

104

Chapter 3 3.2 - Front panel overview

3.2 - FRONT PANEL OVERVIEW

The front panel has two operating modes, supported by a specific software process, REMOTE and LOCAL. In REMOTE mode, only access to DBE 4110 state is available, and no changes may be made to operation. In LOCAL mode, the operator has full control over signal transmission and compression parameters. The mode changing procedure is explained in 3.4 - Ergonomy. The front panel has an LCD, five function keys and a set of 4 LEDs.

MPEG-2

DBE 4110

ESC

DVB

SHIFT

ENT

DBE 4110 front panel

THOMSOM DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 3 3.2 - Front panel overview

105

LEDs The LEDs provide a visual indication of the operating state and/or settings of the equipment. They are interpreted as follows: LED

COLOUR

DESCRIPTION

POWER

green

Device on

UNIT FAIL

red

Prompt alarm preventing operation

WARNING

orange

Deferred alarm not preventing operation or initialisation phase

REMOTE

green

Remote mode selected and control/command session by a remote operating unit

Keypad

ESC

SHIFT

ENT

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSOM DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

106

Chapter 3 3.2 - Front panel overview

Key functions are as follows:

KEYS

FUNCTION

ESC

Ignore modifications or go back to menu above

⇐

Move cursor left, or upwards in a list

⇒

Move cursor right or downwards in a list

ENT

Select item, increment alphanumeric value of a digit when bracketed and save changes

SHIFT and ENT

Select a digit, decrement alphanumeric value of the digit when bracketed

ENT and ⇐ or ⇒ Enhance or reduce LCD contrast Note: The SHIFT and ENT keys cannot be used to select the IP address.

A beep sounds if the user makes keystroke errors or enters erroneous values: ENT: BEEP if the editing mode is not allowed. ⇐: BEEP if no previous choice. ⇒: BEEP if no further choice.

LCD presentation: The LCD features 4 lines of 40 characters each. First line: displays the menu level, when followed by "/" - displays the current sub-menu level and sub-menu of the parameters displayed below. when followed by ":" - current parameter value of associated menu item is displayed.

Second line: displays various messages (blank, question, parameter, etc.).

THOMSOM DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 3 3.2 - Front panel overview

107

Third line: displays menu item or new value to be selected and entered Or, at sub-menu level, displays one item with its current value

Fourth line: at menu level: menu item, using the SHIFT key and moving the cursor at sub-menu level: displays one item with its current value on editing page: context-sensitive help (e.g. parameter range) or error message

Menu tree navigation and editing principle The symbols guide operation and the markers help to locate and/or select displayed items.

SYMBOL ........

INDICATION selection cursor moved with left/right arrow keys selection pointer moved with left/right arrow keys to move up and down menus, then press ENT for editing menu fixed marker for upward extension of menu/parameter list fixed marker for downward extension of menu/parameter list

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSOM DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

108

Chapter 3 3.3 - Welcome and main screens

3.3 - WELCOME AND MAIN SCREENS

When the DBE 4110 is switched on, the following screen is displayed:

*** Basic system check . . . OK *** Bootstrap version 2.45 - 16-Dec-99 (32768 Kbytes DRAM installed) (c) 1999 - THOMSON BROADCAST SYSTEMS Figure 1: Welcome screen

*** Autotest in progress ***

This is followed by the main screens: - the start menu:

/ Root : Transmit

Preset

Mod.Setup

Enc.O/P

Encoding

Scrambling

Alarm

Other

Figure 2: Main screen

The selection cursor fourth lines.

...

moves with the ⇐ and ⇒ keys on the third and the

Press the ENT key on the keypad to select the required command, then the relevant sub-menu is displayed.

THOMSOM DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 3 3.3 - Welcome and main screens

109

- the default window: After a reboot, the LCD displays a default window, which gives the configuration parameters.

/ [station name] MOD OFF

NON INVERTED

6.11132 Ms / s

QPSK 3/4

PAL 420

0.032000 Mb / s

A1 - OFF A2 - OFF

204 ALARM

IF 70.000 MHz FREE

Note: The default screen displays 0.032 Mb/s even if no video component is generated. The station name field directly refers to the service name.

Press ESC to switch between the start menu and the default window. After 3 minutes without any action on the keypad, the start menu automatically goes back to the default window. There are several warning windows: when the operator wants to quit a screen without saving or wants to confirm saving. When "ALARM" flashes press ENT for direct access to the "Alarm" menu, then ESC to return to the initial state to correct the source of any alarms.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSOM DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

110

Chapter 3 3.4 - Ergonomy

3.4 - ERGONOMY

3.4.1 - Operating mode The functions available on the front panel vary according to the type of connection which may be a LOCAL connection (both consult and modify operations are authorised) or a REMOTE connection (only consult mode is authorised). To change operating modes (to change from REMOTE mode to LOCAL mode or vice versa), proceed as follows: 1. Go to the start menu (press ESC). The LCD screen offers the following options

/ Root : Transmit

Preset

Mod.Setup

Enc.O/P

Encoding

Scrambling

Alarm

Other

2. Press the ⇒ or ⇐ key, move the cursor to the Other field, then press the ENT key. The following screen appears:

Root / Other : Setup

Monitor

Tools

3. Select the Tools field, then press the ENT key.

Other / Tools :

THOMSOM DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 3 3.4 - Ergonomy

111

Control

Ip Address

About

Time

Reboot

Option

4. The cursor will be on the CONTROL field, press ENT.

Tools / Control : LOCAL Control : LOCAL Switch to local mode The first line features the current value (in this case LOCAL mode). To change the value, click on the ⇒ key. The choice of mode is LOCAL or REMOTE. • Click on the ENT key. The following screen appears:

ARE YOU SURE? (ENT) = YES

(ESC) = NO

For confirmation, press the ENT key. For cancellation, press the ESC key. • Press the ESC key:

EXIT WITHOUT SAVING (ENT) = YES

(ESC) = NO

• Go back to the Control screen.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSOM DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

112

Chapter 3 3.4 - Ergonomy

3.4.2 - Changing parameters ON AIR The encoder has a transmission interrupt/restore mechanism in the event of a parameter change On Air. If you edit essential transmission parameters On Air transmission is stopped. Information is displayed on the warning screen.

THOMSOM DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 3 3.5 - External modulator connection

113

3.5 - EXTERNAL MODULATOR CONNECTION

When an external modulator is connected, IF access is available and it is possible to control RF depending on the output modulator (IF, L, Ku, C). The possible level range is -35 to -5 dBm.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSOM DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

114

Chapter 3 3.6 - Menu tree

3.6 - MENU TREE

The following page illustrates the menu tree with all the options.

THOMSOM DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

115

Chapter 3 3.6 - Menu tree

MAIN

TRANSMIT

PRESET

MOD.SETUP

ENC.O/P

ENCODING

SCRAMBLING

ALARM

OTHER

IF

RECALL

TX O/P

L-Band

VIDEO

SETUP

MONITOR

TOOLS

IF Freq

STORE

IF

Low Level

AUDIO

ASI I/P

OUTPUT

CONTROL

DATA

S_ID

INPUT

IP ADDRESS

Nom Level

ERASE

L-BAND

L-Band Low Level Nom Level

CONVOLUTION

FRAMING

REBOOT

SYMBOL_R

STATION NAME

OPTION

INFO.BNDWDTH

MSDL

ABOUT

Osc Band C/Ku Freq

ROLL_OFF

TIME

SPECTRUM

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

116

Chapter 3 3.6 - Menu tree

BLANK PAGE

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 3 3.7 - Sections associated with the menu

117

3.7 - SECTIONS ASSOCIATED WITH THE MENU

3.8.2 - TRANSMIT screen 3.8.3 - PRESET screen

3.8.3.1 - PRESET / Recall screen 3.8.3.2 - PRESET / Store screen 3.8.3.3 - PRESET / Erase screen

3.8.4 - MOD.SETUP screen

3.8.4.1 - MOD.SETUP / Tx O/P screen 3.8.4.2 - MOD.SETUP / If screen 3.8.4.3 - MOD.SETUP / L-Band screen 3.8.4.4 - MOD.SETUP / Convolution screen 3.8.4.5 - MOD.SETUP / Symbol_R screen 3.8.4.6 - MOD.SETUP / Info/Bandwidth screen 3.8.4.7 - MOD.SETUP / Roll_off screen 3.8.4.8 - MOD.SETUP / Spectrum screen

3.8.5 - ENC.O/P screen 3.8.6 - ENCODING screen

3.8.6.1 - ENCODING / Video screen 3.8.6.2 - ENCODING / Audio screen 3.8.6.3 - ENCODING / Data screen

3.8.7 - SCRAMBLING screen 3.8.8 - ALARM screen

List of alarms

3.8.9 - OTHER screen

3.8.9.1 - OTHER / Setup screen 3.8.9.2 - OTHER / Monitor screen 3.8.9.2.1 - OTHER / Monitor / Output screen 3.8.9.2.2 - OTHER / Monitor / Input screen 3.8.9.3 - OTHER / Tools screen 3.8.9.3.1 - OTHER / Tools / Control screen 3.8.9.3.2 - OTHER / Tools / IP Address screen 3.8.9.3.4 - OTHER / Tools / Reboot screen 3.8.9.3.5 - OTHER / Tools / Option screen 3.8.9.3.6 - OTHER / Tools / About screen 3.8.9.3.7 - OTHER / Tools / Time screen

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

118

Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

3.8 - DESCRIPTION OF THE MENU AND ASSOCIATED SCREENS

3.8.1 - Main screen

/ Root : Transmit

Preset

Mod.Setup

Enc.O/P

Encoding

Scrambling

Alarm

Other

When the cursor is placed on the last parameter Other, a beep is emitted. By pressing the right arrow key, the cursor goes back to the Transmit parameter. Otherwise, the left arrow key takes the cursor back to Alarm, Scrambling, etc.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

119

3.8.2 - TRANSMIT screen • In the main screen, select the TRANSMIT field and press the ENT key. • The TRANSMIT menu appears:

Transmit / IF: CARRIER OFF IF :

CARRIER OFF

The output is disabled The TRANSMIT menu offers the option between CARRIER OFF, PURE CARRIER LOW LEVEL, PURE CARRIER NOM LEVEL and MODULATION ON by clicking with the right/left arrow key. Note: In the IF area between the selection cursor, only one value is displayed at a time, you can search within the list by pressing the right or left arrow keys as many times as necessary.

For a PURE CARRIER LOW LEVEL transmission, the range level is -25.0 to -5dBm in 0.5 steps. When PURE CARRIER LOW LEVEL is selected, press ENT to set the low level then ENT to validate. For a PURE CARRIER NOM LEVEL transmission, the range level is the same. When the MODULATION ON is selected, press ENT to adjust the nominal level, then ENT to validate. In any case, the values are updated in the Mod.Setup menu. • Select the parameter in the IF area. The scrolling order is: CARRIER OFF, PURE CARRIER LOW LEVEL, PURE CARRIER NOM LEVEL, MODULATION ON. • Press the ENT key. Caution: No operator acknowledgement is requested. Note: Whatever the modulator state is, before rebooting, it will be CARRIER OFF when the unit is switched on again.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

120

Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

3.8.3 - PRESET screen In the main screen, select the PRESET field and press the ENT key.

Root / Preset : Recall

Store

Erase

The menu offers the possibility of recalling configurations, storing new configurations and erasing configurations.

3.8.3.1 - PRESET / Recall screen In the PRESET screen, select the Recall field and press the ENT key.

Preset / Recall : A

: SNG-LBR

B

: SNG-HBR

C

: LBR+DATA

1

: configuration name_1

8

: configuration name_8

• By clicking on the right arrow key, you can select the required configuration. Eight user configurations are available, plus 3 factory-installed configurations (A, B, C). All the characteristics of these configurations are described in the following table:

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

SERVICE

VIDEO

AUDIO1&2

DATA

TRANSMISSION

47232437AK01 June 2003

121

A

B

C

Service ID

100

100

100

PMT PID

257

257

257

PCR PID

100

100

100

Type

Digital TV Service (1)

Digital TV Service (1)

Digital TV Service (1)

Name

TV

TV

TV

Provider name

None

None

None

Scrambling

Clear mode

Clear mode

Clear mode

Profile

4:2:0 MP@ML

4:2:2 P@ML

4:2:2 P@ML

PID

100

100

100

Bit Rate

7.6Mbit/s

20Mbit/s

9Mbit/s

Coding

No low delay

No low delay

No low delay

Source

SDI

SDI

SDI

Resolution

720x576

720x576

720x576

GOP

12

12

12

IP frame

3

3

3

Aspect ratio

4/3

4/3

4/3

Input

Analogue

Analogue

Analogue

PID audio 1

110

110

110

PID audio 2

111

111

111

Bit rate

256kbit/s

384kbit/s

384kbit/s

Mode

Stereo

Stereo

Stereo

Coding

MPEG1 Layer 2

MPEG1 Layer 2

MPEG1 Layer 2

PID

Not used

Not used

103

Baud rate

Not used

Not used

9600

Stream type

Not used

Not used

0x80

Symbol rate

6.111Ms/s

23.333Ms/s

6.666Ms/s

Modulation

QPSK

QPSK

QPSK

Code rate

3/4

7/8

7/8

Roll Off

Auto

Auto

Auto

Level

-15dBm

-15dBm

-15dBm

Output

Off Air

Off Air

Off Air

Spectral inversion

Off

Off

Off

Packet size

204

204

204

IF frequency

70MHz

70MHz

70MHz

L-Band

1140.0MHz

1140.0MHz

1140.0MHz

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

122

Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

All other parameters are not saved or recalled. Note: If the N41S422P option is not implemented, the predefined configuration "SNG-HBR" is not available. This is also the case with option N41SD56K - RS232 regarding the LBR+DATA configuration.

• Select the required configuration and press the ENT key.

3.8.3.2 - PRESET / Store screen In the PRESET screen, select the Store field and press the ENT key.

Preset / Store : 1

: configuration name

2

: configuration name

3

: configuration name

Press the ENT key. The following screen appears to enter the configuration name.

Preset / Store/1 : NEW :

XXXXXXX

SAVE

info: The name of a new configuration is composed of 16 digits. The operator modifies digits one by one by pressing ENT to increment the value then moving the cursor with the right arrow key to go to the next character. Then place the cursor on the SAVE command and press the ENT key. Up to 8 user configurations can be stored. XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX is an alphanumeric character string. The characters allowed are: A...Z and 0, 1...9 plus some other characters (-, :, blank).

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

123

3.8.3.3 - PRESET / Erase screen In the PRESET screen, select the Erase field and press the ENT key.

Preset / Erase: 1

: configuration name

2

: configuration name

3

: configuration name

• Press ENT on the selected configuration to be removed, confirmation will be requested.

ARE YOU SURE? (ENT) = YES

(ESC) = NO

• Press ENT, configuration is acknowledged, then back to Preset menu. • Press ESC, configuration is cancelled, then back to Preset menu. Note: It is not possible to erase preset configurations A, B and C. They are not displayed on this screen.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

124

Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

3.8.4 - MOD.SETUP screen In the main menu, select the Mod.Setup field and press the ENT key. The following screen appears:

Root / Mod.Setup: Tx O/P

: IF

If

: CARRIER OFF

L-Band

: UNUSED

Convolution Symbol R Info Bndwdth Roll Off Spectrum

: QPSK 7/8 : 06.666571 Ms/s : 08.99987 MHz : AUTOMATIC : NON INVERTED

3.8.4.1 - MOD.SETUP / Tx O/P screen In the Mod.Setup screen, select the Tx O/P field and press the ENT key.

Mod.Setup /Tx O/P: IF Tx O/P:

IF

The current value is given on the first line. The Tx O/P area allows the operator to choose between the values IF and L-Band using the ⇒ and ⇐ keys, then by pressing ENT the new value is taken into account and the first line is updated.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

125

3.8.4.2 - MOD.SETUP / If screen In the Mod.Setup screen select the If field and press the ENT key.

Mod.Setup /If: IF Freq

: 00070.000 MHz

Low Level

: -25.0

Nom Level

: -10.0

Press ENT.

IF / IF Freq: NEW : X X . X X X X X X Ms/s SAVE info : 50-180 MHz Press ENT to increment the value in the NEW field. The range is from 0-9. Press SAVE once the value has been obtained. No confirmation is requested. If the value requested falls outside the range specified on the fourth line info, the message "incorrect value" is displayed and no change is made. To change the Low Level or Nom Level parameter press ENT on the required option. The current level will be displayed on the first line and can be changed in 0.5 steps on line 3 using the ⇒ (higher) and ⇐ (lower) keys. The lowest possible value for both Low Level and Nom Level is -25.0 (max. 05.0 dBm). A beep sounds when an unauthorised value is requested. The two screens are as follows:

IF Low/Level: -25.0 Level:

47232437AK01 June 2003

-25.0

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

126

Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

IF Nominal/Level: -10.0 Level:

-10.0

3.8.4.3 - MOD.SETUP / L-Band screen In the Mod.Setup screen, select the L-Band field and press the ENT key.

Mod.Setup /L-Band: L-Band Freq

: 1140.000 MHz

Low Level

: -25.0

Nom Level

: -10.0

Osc. band Osc. value

: none / c / ku : non / c / ku

F can be set in 1 kHz steps. The level range is: -20 dBm - +5.0 dBm. Press ENT.

L-Band / L-Band Freq: NEW : X X . X X X X X X Ms/s SAVE info : 950-1750 MHz

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

127

For details on Low Level and Nom Level value editing, saving and ranges refer to section 3.8.4.2 - MOD.SETUP / If screen.

3.8.4.4 - MOD.SETUP / Convolution screen In the Mod.Setup screen, select the Convolution field and press the ENT key.

Mod.Setup / Convolution : QPSK 3/4 Convolution :

QPSK 3/4

The current value is given on the first line. The operator can choose between the different values in the following list, depending on modulator capabilities: QPSK 1/2, QPSK 2/3, QPSK 3/4, QPSK 5/6, QPSK 7/8, 8PSK 2/3, 8PSK 5/6, 8PSK 8/9, 16QAM3/4, 16QAM7/8, in compliance with EN 300421 standard "Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB); Framing structure, channel coding and modulation for 11/12GHz satellite services".

The operator can tune the Convolution parameter by pressing the ⇒ and ⇐ keys. When the value is chosen, press ENT, the first line is updated.

3.8.4.5 - MOD.SETUP / Symbol_R screen In the Mod.Setup screen, select the Symbol_R field and press the ENT key.

Mod.Setup / Symbol Rate : NEW : X X . X X X X X X Ms/s SAVE info : Max=16.000 Ms/s • The digit to be modified is highlighted. The sign can be moved with the left and right arrow key. 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

128

Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

• To increment the digit value, press the ENT key until the required value has been reached. Constant pressing may speed up the process up to 3 characters per second. • To save the new value, move the cursor to SAVE and press ENT. The current value is automatically updated. • Should the operator press the ESC key after editing (even without pressing SAVE), a warning window is displayed.

EXIT WITHOUT SAVING (ENT) = YES

(ESC) = NO

Case of choosing YES: no change occurs, the Mod.Setup is displayed. Case of choosing NO: The symbol-rate editing screen is displayed. Note: The Info/Bandwidth field is updated accordingly - as well as the encoder output bitrate audio and video rate on relevant control menus.

3.8.4.6 - MOD.SETUP / Info/Bandwidth screen In the Mod.Setup screen, select the Info/Bndwdth screen and press the ENT key. A beep is emitted and the screen remains unchanged:

Root/Mod. Setup

:

Symbol R

: 06.666571 Ms/s

Info Bndwdth

: 08.99987 MHz

Roll Off

: AUTOMATIC

This screen is displayed for information. No editing is allowed. The bandwidth value is computed according to the Symbol_rate value and the relevant Roll_off factor.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

129

3.8.4.7 - MOD.SETUP / Roll_off screen In the Mod.Setup screen, select the Roll_off field and press the ENT key.

Mod.Setup / Roll Off : AUTOMATIC Roll Off:

AUTOMATIC

The Roll_off can be selected by pressing the ⇒ and ⇐ keys. The possible values are 26, 35 or AUTOMATIC. Press the ENT key to validate. Notes: The Info/Bandwidth value is internally computed according to the Symbol_rate and the Roll_off values. Roll-off values are in accordance with EN301210 standard "Digital Video Broadcast

(DVB); Framing structure, channel coding and modulation for Digital Satellite News Gathering (DSNG) and other contribution applications by satellite" QPSK + 35%, 8PSK + AUTO or 26% (default) or 35%, 16QAM + 26%.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

130

Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

3.8.4.8 - MOD.SETUP / Spectrum screen In the Mod.Setup screen, select the Spectrum field and press the ENT key.

Mod.Setup / Spectrum : NON INVERTED Spectrum:

NON INVERTED

The possible values are INVERTED or NON INVERTED.

3.8.5 - ENC.O/P screen In the main menu, select the Enc.Output field and press the ENT key.

Root / Enc.Output : NEW : X X . X X X X X X Mb/s

SAVE

info : Max=28.000 Mb/s This screen may be used for setting the output encoder frequency/TS rate. If a value above the max specified value is entered, the "incorrect value" message is displayed. If the hardware modulator option is set, this screen is available for information only.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

131

3.8.6 - ENCODING screen In the main screen, select the Encoding field and press the ENT key.

Root / Encoding : AUD_1

VID_1

AUD_2

SER_1

The data and AMuSE items are displayed if related options are available in the device. • Select the required component and press the ENT key. • Or press ESC if no change and exit to previous menu level.

3.8.6.1 - ENCODING / Video screen In the Encoding screen, select the Video field and press the ENT key.

Encoding / Video Status :

Enable

Source:

Digital serial 50Hz

Profile:

420 MP@ML

Rate / Auto: Vid_Rate: Latency: Resolution: PID:

Yes 07.00000 Mb/s NORMAL - GOP 12/3 720X576 0100

• Select the required parameter and press the ENT key.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

132

Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

Parameters

Available choices

Status

Enable or disable

Source

Digital serial 50Hz, Digital serial 60Hz, Pattern 50Hz, Pattern 60Hz, Composite PAL BDGHI, Composite SECAM, Composite NTSC-M 60Hz

Profile

420MP@ML or 422P@ML (option)

Rate / Auto

Yes or No

Vid_rate

from 0.5 to 15Mb/s in MP@ML from 0.5 to 50Mb/s in 422P@ML

Latency

Normal - GOP 12/3, Normal - GOP 15/3, Low - GOP 12/1, Low - GOP 8/1, Ultra low (I frame, only)

Resolution

720x576, 704x576, 544x576, 480x576, 352x576, 352x288

PID

Within the range 32 - 8190

Note: For the Rate/Auto parameter, the default value is "YES". It should be set to "NO" if using the ASI TS input option (N41STSIN) or RS232 option (N41SD56K).

• Select ENT to validate your choice or select ESC to cancel changes.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

133

3.8.6.2 - ENCODING / Audio screen In the ENCODING screen, select the Audio field (e.g. AUD_1 or AUD_2) then press the ENT key.

Encoding / Audio1/2:

47232437AK01 June 2003

Status

: Enable

Source

: Analog

Mode / Rate

: Stereo 256kbits

Headroom Alignment Pid

: 20 dB : 4 dBu : 0110

Parameters

Available choices

Status

Enable or disable

Source

Analog, Tone, Unbalanced, Balanced, SDI

Mode / Rate

Mono 64, 96, 128 Kbits Dual 128, 192, 256, 384 Kbits Stereo 128, 192, 256, 384 Kbits Joint 128, 192, 256, 384 Kbits

Headroom

8 - 20 dB, in 1dB steps

Alignment

0 - 4 dBu, in 1dBu steps

PID

Within the range 32 - 8190

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

134

Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

Note: • Mode / Rate modification automatically causes Video_rate adjustment. • The Headroom and Alignment parameters can be changed if the analog audio is selected.

3.8.6.3 - ENCODING / Data screen In the ENCODING screen, select the Data field (e.g. SER_1) and press the ENT key.

Encoding / Data / Status

: Enable

Transfer

: 9600

PID

: 0103

There is only one screen for the data parameters. This screen is proposed if the Data injection option (N41SD56K) is enabled.

Parameters

Available choices

Status

Enable or disable

Transfer

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 bauds

PID

Within the range 0 - 8190, excluding PCR, video, audio PIDs used in the locally generated service.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

135

3.8.7 - SCRAMBLING screen In the main menu, select the Scrambling field and press the ENT key.

Root / Scrambling : BISS MODE_1

This mode is in compliance with the BISS standard set out in the reference document EBU / Tech.3290 "Basic Interoperable Scrambling System (BISS)". Press ENT.

Scrambling / Mode 1 : Status :

Disable

Session word:

15.34.56.23.45.67

If no Mode_1 is active, the current mode value is NONE. To modify the Session word, the Status must be set to "enable" and the DVB Scrambling/BISS option must be declared.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

136

Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

3.8.8 - ALARM screen In the main menu, select the ALARM screen and press the ENT key.

ALARM / 5 Alarms : 17 / 519 [SSEB / AUD2] : right signal under -65dBFS 34 / 0 A distinction is made between prompt and deferred alarms. You can move up and down the alarm list with the left and right arrow keys. - first line: number of alarms - second line: only one alarm is described in the screen. This line gives the number of one alarm. - third line: the cause of the alarm. - fourth line: the following alarm. Note: Should an alarm occur, "ALARM" flashes in the default window.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

137

3.8.9 - OTHER screen In the main menu, select the Other field and press the ENT key.

Root / Other : Monitor

Setup

Tools

3.8.9.1 - OTHER / Setup screen In the Other screen, select the Setup field and press the ENT key.

Other / Setup : S Id

Asi I/P

Framing

Station Name

Msdl

Parameters

Available choices

ASI Input

Disable or enable

S-Id

Service name and PID (5 digits)

Framing

188 or 204

Station name

8 digits

Msdl

disabled (beep)

ASI input: If this parameter is enabled, it is no longer possible to auto-adjust the video rate on the remultiplexing unit. 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

138

Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

Station name: The parameter is sent in the TSDT table. The name is also displayed on the front panel at upper menu level. It is mapped into the service name. Framing: When changing MPEG framing, the Symbol_rate is not affected, but the relevant output clock rate is computed.

3.8.9.2 - OTHER / Monitor screen In the Other screen, select the Monitor field and press the ENT key. This consultation menu indicates the bitrate, the source and the mode for each output video and audio component.

CONTEXT: Output

Input

(ENT) : Output signal 3.8.9.2.1 - OTHER / Monitor / Output screen • Select the Output field, then press ENT to obtain the services of the TS output.

CONTEXT:/Output / Output flow : 4136 kb/s TV: 100 Service flow : 4639kb/s • Press ENT to get the components of the selected service.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

139

CONTEXT:/Output / TV : 100 Service flow (TV : 100) : 4639kb/s AUD:110

AUD :111

VID:100

SER:768

Component flow : 4107kb/s 3.8.9.2.2 - OTHER / Monitor / Input screen The service is visible when ASI I/P is "enabled". In addition PID conflict management is supported. • Go back to the MONITOR screen, then select the Input field.

CONTEXT:/Input / IN1 (ENT) : Input services • Press ENT to get the services of the selected TS input.

CONTEXT:/Input / IN1 COD3: TV41 COD3: TV42 Service flow : 406 kb/s • Press ENT to get the components of the selected service.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

140

Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

CONTEXT: /. . . /Input / IN1 / COD3 TV41 Service flow (TV : 100) : 583 kb/s VID:1000 AUD :1001 AUD : 1002 Component flow : 204 kb/s

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

141

3.8.9.3 - OTHER / Tools screen In the Other screen, select the Tools field and press the ENT key.

Other / Tools : Control

Ip Address

About

Time

Reboot

Option

3.8.9.3.1 - OTHER / Tools / Control screen The Control menu is already described in section 3.4 - Ergonomy. 3.8.9.3.2 - OTHER / Tools / IP Address screen The IP address defines the device address for the control&command network. This TCP/IP protocol network is connected via the Ethernet connector on the device rear panel. In Local mode, it is possible to change the IP Address, IP Netmask and IP Gateway via the encoder front panel. In the Tools screen, select the field to be changed and press ENT. Example: changing the IP address:

Tools / IP Address: IP Address

IP Netmask

IP Gateway

Once you have selected IP Address:

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

142

Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

IP Address / IP Address : NEW :

172.016.010.185

SAVE

info : IP Address Each digit is changed individually. After rebooting, the device takes this new address into account. The IP address and IP netmask or default gateway parameters can also be changed using the {Telnet} application. See section Commands available with the Telnet application page 390

Figure 3: Modification of Addresses

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

143

3.8.9.3.4 - OTHER / Tools / Reboot screen In the Tools screen, select the Reboot field and press the ENT key.

Tools / Reboot : No Autotest Reboot :

No Autotest

When rebooting the device, 3 options are available: No Autotest, Short Autotest or Long Autotest. Note: After rebooting the device, it automatically recovers the previous active configuration and remains in the previous control mode (local or remote).

3.8.9.3.5 - OTHER / Tools / Option screen In the Tools screen, select the Option field and press the ENT key.

Tools / Option : Hardware

Software

"

In the Option screen, select the Software field and press the ENT key.

Option / Software :

47232437AK01 June 2003

00 Low Dl

: Enable

01 VBI Pr

: Enable

02 Ext. Mod

: Disable THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

144

Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

The available options are given in the table below: Option number

Option name

00

Low delay

01

VBI processing

02

External modulator

03

Data injection RS232

04

TS input

05

DVB scrambling / BISS

06

422P@ML

For example for the first option "Low delay", in the NEW area the operator must enter the specific key for this option. Note: The specific key is supplied by NEXTREAM

Option / 04 - TS Inp: NEW :

00.00

SAVE

info : TS input processing Caution: When an option is already declared, the previous screen is displayed with the value 00.00. If the operator validates the SAVE command, the option is disabled.

• Enter the specific key, • Place the cursor on the SAVE field. Press ENT. The following screen is displayed.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

145

will be active only after next reboot

"

In the Option screen, select the Hardware field and press the ENT key.

Option / Hardware : Slot 1

: DPSN

Slot 2

: ISMB

Slot 3

: ALARM RELAY

All the hardware options available with their slot allocation are given in the table below: Slot allocation

Available choices

0

SSEB

1

DPSN, COMPIN, AMuSE AC3 MPEG, NONE

2

ISMB, AMuSE AC3 MPEG, NONE

3

Alarm Relay Closure, NONE

4

ATADI, NONE

• Place the cursor on the required slot and press ENT.

Option / SLOT 2 : ISMB SLOT 2:

47232437AK01 June 2003

ISMB

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

146

Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

The operator can press the right arrow key in the SLOT 2 area between the selection cursors to choose between ISMB, AMuSE AC3 MPEG and NONE. When the choice is made, press ENT and the following screen appears:

will be active only after next reboot

3.8.9.3.6 - OTHER / Tools / About screen In the Tools screen, select the About field and press the ENT key.

CONTEXT : / Autotest

Information

Connections

(ENT) : Autotest report

In the About screen, select the Autotest field and press the ENT key. The following screen appears for 2 seconds: "

CONTEXT : / Autotest Autotest OK

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

147

In the About screen, select the Information field and press the ENT key. This menu comprises 4 screens:

"

First screen: Software version and IP address

CONTEXT : / Information Type : SSE

IP Address : 172.16.10.175

TES: 99.41

SSB: 2.0.6.4

Scrambler :

ALL

ISP :9 Hdw: 4

50Hz PRESS ENT

Second screen: Licensed software options

CONTEXT : / Information -- OPTIONS LIST -0

1

2

3

4

5

6

N41SLODE : Low delay

Third screen: Licensed hardware options

CONTEXT : / Information Slot 1 : DPSN

Slot 2 : ISMB MODUL

Firmware 2.30

Fourth screen: Equipment code used to obtain new software options

CONTEXT : / Information Equipment code : 0XCE1C Serial number : 16831237AA/01004 AUD10:600 AUD11:600

47232437AK01 June 2003

AUD20:600 AUD21:600

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

148

Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

Note: The equipment code is required for licence code generation to enable software options. "

In the About screen, select the Connections field and press the ENT key.

CONTEXT : / Connections -- CONNECTIONS LIST -PC : EVT

PC : INFO

PC : INFO

[PC name] 3.8.9.3.7 - OTHER / Tools / Time screen In the Tools screen, select the Time field and press the ENT key.

CONTEXT : / Time (Y/M/D H:M:S) : time (ENT) : Time set The Time field indicates the current date and time. In LOCAL mode, the user can modify the date by pressing the ENT key. The third and fourth lines are modified and the following screen appears:

CONTEXT : / Time (Y/M/D H:M:S) : time +

YYYY

MM

DD

HH

MM

SS

Rec

(ENT) : change increment mode

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

149

Field definitions and adjustment ranges • The first field can take the values "+" (increase) or "-" (decrease). • The YYYY (year) field ranges between 1900 and 2107. • The MM (month) field ranges between 1 and 12. • The DD (day) field ranges between 1 and 31. • The HH (hour) field ranges between 0 and 23. • The MM (minutes) field ranges between 0 and 59. • The SS (seconds) field ranges between 0 and 59. • The Rec (update) field records the current timer values.

Operating mode • To increase (or decrease) a field value, firstly check that there is a + sign (or - sign) in the first field (if not, select the first field and press ENT). Then, select the field to be adjusted. Finally, press ENT as many times as necessary to get the required value. • Once the new time has been programmed, select the Rec field and press ENT to confirm. If the time can be set (LOCAL mode), the previous menu then reappears. In REMOTE mode, the system emits a beep. Note: The time to be entered is the local time. The offset between local and UTC time may be set by a remote PC station. This time can be updated either by the front panel or by the receiving of a broadcast message from GALET software (UTC Time Broadcaster) or by TDT. The default value is set to +2h00 (i.e. local time = UTC time + 2h00).

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

150

Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

BLANK PAGE

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 - PC operation - Control & Command software

151

Chapter 4 PC operation - Control & Command software 4.1 - Ergonomic aspects ............................................................................ 4.1.1 - Screen .......................................................................................... 4.1.2 - Mouse ........................................................................................... 4.1.3 - Setting the interface language ...................................................... 4.1.4 - On-line manuals............................................................................ 4.1.5 - Simulator mode.............................................................................

155 155 159 160 162 163

4.1.5.1 - Activation of simulator mode ........................................................ 163 4.1.5.2 - Simulation of options.................................................................... 164

4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking .............................................................. 165 4.2 - Running software ............................................................................... 168 4.3 - {Equipment Interface} application .................................................... 170 4.4 - {Equipment Installation} application ................................................ 4.4.1 - Purpose and scope of the application........................................... 4.4.2 - Screen layout................................................................................ 4.4.3 - Declaring the device ..................................................................... 4.4.4 - Cancelling/validating device installation changes.........................

173 173 174 175 179

4.4.4.1 - Cancelling changes to device installation .................................... 179 4.4.4.2 - Validating changes to device installation ..................................... 180

4.4.5 - Additional device installation commands ...................................... 181 4.4.5.1 - Remove a device ......................................................................... 181 4.4.5.2 - Change device name and address .............................................. 181

4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application ............................................. 4.5.1 - Purpose and scope of the application........................................... 4.5.2 - Screen layout................................................................................ 4.5.3 - Device parameters........................................................................

184 184 186 189

4.5.3.1 - Encoder operating parameters (advanced parameters) .............. 189 4.5.3.1.1 - “General” item ............................................................................. 4.5.3.1.2 - “Output” item ............................................................................... 4.5.3.1.3 - “Encoders” item........................................................................... 4.5.3.1.4 - “Data injection” item ....................................................................

47232437AK01 June 2003

192 194 196 199

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

152

Chapter 4 - PC operation - Control & Command software

4.5.3.1.5 - “Scrambler” item.......................................................................... 4.5.3.1.6 - “SAM card” item .......................................................................... 4.5.3.1.7 - “Access control” item................................................................... 4.5.3.1.8 - “SIMS” item ................................................................................. 4.5.3.1.9 - “Time” item .................................................................................. 4.5.3.1.10 - “TBS Signalling” item................................................................. 4.5.3.1.11 - “ISO Signalling” item ................................................................. 4.5.3.1.12 - “DVB Signalling” item ................................................................ 4.5.3.1.13 - “PSIP Signalling” item ...............................................................

200 201 202 203 204 206 208 209 211

4.5.3.2 - Modulator parameters .................................................................. 212 4.5.3.3 - NIT table ....................................................................................... 215 4.5.3.3.1 - Edit the NIT ................................................................................. 4.5.3.3.2 - Changing descriptors .................................................................. 4.5.3.3.3 - Deleting descriptors..................................................................... 4.5.3.3.4 - Saving/Loading a NIT..................................................................

215 219 219 220

4.5.3.4 - TOT table...................................................................................... 223 4.5.3.4.1 - Edit the TOT ................................................................................ 223 4.5.3.4.2 - Changing descriptors .................................................................. 227 4.5.3.4.3 - Deleting descriptors..................................................................... 227

4.5.3.5 - Saving/Loading a device configuration......................................... 4.5.3.6 - Archived configurations ................................................................ 4.5.3.7 - Cancelling/Validating changes ..................................................... 4.5.3.8 - Device locking / unlocking ............................................................

228 230 235 237

4.5.4 - Generated Services...................................................................... 238 4.5.4.1 - TV service..................................................................................... 239 4.5.4.1.1 - Editing parameters of the video component................................ 4.5.4.1.2 - Editing parameters of the audio component................................ 4.5.4.1.3 - Editing parameters of the VBI component................................... 4.5.4.1.4 - Editing parameters of the data component ................................. 4.5.4.1.5 - PMT descriptors .......................................................................... 4.5.4.1.6 - SDT descriptors...........................................................................

243 255 264 271 283 289

4.5.4.2 - Advanced Functions ..................................................................... 290 4.5.4.2.1 - Shared components .................................................................... 290 4.5.4.2.2 - Ghost components ...................................................................... 291 4.5.4.2.3 - Inband command......................................................................... 293

4.5.5 - TS input ........................................................................................ 293 4.5.5.1 - First level filtering: stopping/passing the TS input ........................ 298 4.5.5.2 - Second level filtering: filtering conditions on the tributary, selecting services and EMM flows ...................................................... 298 4.5.5.2.1 - General filtering conditions on the tributary................................. 298 4.5.5.2.2 - Selection of services ................................................................... 303 4.5.5.2.3 - Selection of EMM flows ............................................................... 306

4.5.5.3 - Third level filtering: filtering conditions on services ...................... 309 4.5.5.3.1 - General filtering conditions.......................................................... 309 4.5.5.3.2 - Individual filtering of components ................................................ 312 4.5.5.3.3 - Attaching components................................................................. 316

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 - PC operation - Control & Command software

153

4.5.5.3.4 - Removing a service .................................................................... 321

4.5.5.4 - Fourth level filtering: filtering conditions on components ............. 322 4.5.5.4.1 - General filtering conditions ......................................................... 322 4.5.5.4.2 - Removing a component .............................................................. 324

4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application......................................... 4.6.1 - Purpose and scope of the application........................................... 4.6.2 - Screen layout................................................................................ 4.6.3 - Alarm supervision .........................................................................

326 326 327 334

4.6.3.1 - Alarms window ............................................................................. 334 4.6.3.2 - Equipment window ....................................................................... 338

4.6.4 - Supervision of services and data flow .......................................... 4.6.5 - Save all/Load all commands......................................................... 4.6.6 - Maintenance commands............................................................... 4.6.7 - Audible warning of alarms ............................................................

340 343 344 350

4.7 - {Download} application .................................................................... 4.7.1 - Purpose and scope of the application........................................... 4.7.2 - Screen layout................................................................................ 4.7.3 - Procedure .....................................................................................

351 351 351 353

4.7.3.1 - Before downloading ..................................................................... 353 4.7.3.2 - Downloading ................................................................................ 358 4.7.3.3 - After downloading ........................................................................ 359

4.7.4 - Additional commands ................................................................... 360 4.8 - {Event Log} application .................................................................... 362 4.8.1 - Principles of the {Event Log} application ...................................... 362 4.8.1.1 - Event ............................................................................................ 4.8.1.2 - View configuration functions ........................................................ 4.8.1.3 - Event exporting ............................................................................ 4.8.1.4 - Miscellaneous ..............................................................................

362 363 363 364

4.8.2 - Screen layout................................................................................ 364 4.8.3 - Commands ................................................................................... 368 4.8.3.1 - Commands for opening an event log file ..................................... 4.8.3.2 - Command for exporting in text format.......................................... 4.8.3.3 - Display commands....................................................................... 4.8.3.4 - Calculation commands.................................................................

368 369 371 376

4.9 - {Alarm Help} application.................................................................... 379 4.9.1 - Scope............................................................................................ 379 4.9.2 - Features........................................................................................ 379 4.9.2.1 - Extended description of alarms.................................................... 379 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

154

Chapter 4 - PC operation - Control & Command software

4.9.2.2 - Print capability .............................................................................. 4.9.2.3 - Search engine .............................................................................. 4.9.2.4 - Navigation tool.............................................................................. 4.9.2.5 - Synchronisation with the {Monitoring & Redundancy} and {Event Log} applications................................................................ 4.9.2.6 - Synchronisation with other applications ....................................... 4.9.2.7 - User defined comments................................................................ 4.9.2.8 - French/English versions ............................................................... 4.9.2.9 - Customisation of display............................................................... 4.9.2.10 - Summary of alarms .................................................................... 4.9.2.11 - Help / About................................................................................

380 380 380 380 380 380 381 381 381 381

4.9.3 - Access to the {Alarm help} application ......................................... 382 4.9.3.1 - Access via the {Monitoring &Redundancy} application ................ 382 4.9.3.2 - Access via the {Event Log} application......................................... 382 4.9.3.3 - Access via any application ........................................................... 383

4.9.4 - User Interface (main window and commands) ............................. 384 4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application ......................... 4.10.1 - Using the Telnet application ....................................................... 4.10.2 - IP Settings .................................................................................. 4.10.3 - Parameter definitions .................................................................

390 390 396 397

4.10.3.1 - Video bidir................................................................................... 4.10.3.2 - Audio stream type....................................................................... 4.10.3.3 - LTW_offset ................................................................................. 4.10.3.4 - SPE (SuperEncoder) switch source mode ................................. 4.10.3.5 - VBI stream type .......................................................................... 4.10.3.6 - LDSChurch mode ....................................................................... 4.10.3.7 - ABSAT mode.............................................................................. 4.10.3.8 - Multichoice-D1 mode.................................................................. 4.10.3.9 - Foxtel 6dB uplift.......................................................................... 4.10.3.10 - Closed Caption type ................................................................. 4.10.3.11 - Extended-data insertion (line 284)............................................

397 397 398 398 398 398 399 399 400 401 401

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.1 - Ergonomic aspects

155

Foreword Some commands cannot be directly accessed using the DBS 2930 operating software, however some of them are described in this chapter. These are notably the commands that can be accessed using the {Telnet} application as described in the section Commands available with the Telnet application page 390.

4.1 - ERGONOMIC ASPECTS

4.1.1 - Screen The screen displays: • • • • •

a title, a menu bar, a tool bar, a main window, a status bar.

When you declare the services and components, you will display the following screen:

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

156

Chapter 4 4.1 - Ergonomic aspects

menu bar

tool bar

main window

status bar

Figure 4.1: Example of screen

• Title The title displays the application name. • Menu bar The menu bar provides access to various functions that can be selected via pulldown menus activated with a left mouse click: • quit the session (Quit menu); • confirm, cancel or test changes (Edit menu); • lock/unlock and save functions (Tool menu); • display the software release or access the on-line User Manual (Help menu).

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.1 - Ergonomic aspects

157

• Tool bar The first three buttons provide quick access to the most frequently used functions in the menu bar: • quit the application ( bar),

button equivalent to the Quit control of the menu

• cancel a change ( menu bar),

button equivalent to the Edit/Cancel control of the

• confirm a change ( menu bar).

button equivalent to the Edit/Validate control of the

The fourth and fifth buttons ( station.

47232437AK01 June 2003

and

) are used to lock or unlock the operating

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

158

Chapter 4 4.1 - Ergonomic aspects

• Main window Information appearing in this area is specific to each application as regards content and formatting (tree structure, icon representation, divisions of the main window). A tree structure display function (+/- sign) is available in all applications. +: lower level tree structure not displayed. -: lower level tree structure displayed. without sign: indicates no lower level exists. To display or remove display of the lower level tree structure, double-click on the line featuring the "+" or "-" sign or click once on the "+" or "-" sign.

Figure 4.2: Example of main window with lower level displayed

Figure 4.3: Example of main window with lower level not displayed THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.1 - Ergonomic aspects

159

When the configuration is active, the status bar displays Active configuration. Otherwise, the Edited configuration message replaces Active configuration. A pencil indicates the inconsistency between the information displayed and the real configuration. The icon will appear each time the operator edits a configuration. The pencil disappears when the operator validates the configuration (click on the button, the Edit/Validate... command in the menu bar or the Validate modifications... command in the shortcut menu related to the device in some applications) or cancels the changes (click on the button, the Edit/Cancel... command in the menu bar or the Cancel modifications... command in the shortcut menu related to the device in some applications).

• Status bar The status bar provides context-sensitive help, which is general information the user may require at any time. It is situated at the bottom of the main window.

4.1.2 - Mouse The left mouse button is used to select an object. The right mouse button displays a shortcut menu showing all the possible actions for this object. Left mouse button (selecting an object)

Right mouse button (displaying shortcut menu)

Figure 4.4: Using the mouse (e.g. for encoder configuration) 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

160

Chapter 4 4.1 - Ergonomic aspects

4.1.3 - Setting the interface language In all applications except the {Equipment Interface} application, the language used for the interface can be selected in the Windows Control Panel (Regional Settings application). Screens are available in French (for French-speaking countries) or English. , Procedure 1. In the Start menu, select Settings, then Control Panel. 2. Click on the Regional Settings icon. 3. In the first tab in this window, choose the interface language: French (Standard) or English (United Kingdom). Notes: - The language of the {Alarm Help} application cannot be set. It corresponds to the language chosen in the Windows Control Panel (Regional Settings application) during installation of the DBS 2930 “STAND ALONE” software. - The chosen language is only acknowledged on application startup. When changing languages, rerun any open applications.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.1 - Ergonomic aspects

161

Figure 4.5: Regional Settings (Windows NT) or Regional Options (Windows 2000)

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

162

Chapter 4 4.1 - Ergonomic aspects

4.1.4 - On-line manuals A command is available on the menu bar of the applications for rapid access to the on-line versions of the user manuals installed on the PC. This command, located in the Help menu (Help/Operating manual...), displays the list of .pdf documents located in a default directory. The default directory can be changed by clicking on Browse...

When you double-click on a document, ACROBAT READER is run as required, loading the .pdf file corresponding to the selected manual. If you do not have ACROBAT READER, you can install it from the Documentation CD via the Get Acrobat Reader button.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.1 - Ergonomic aspects

163

4.1.5 - Simulator mode This mode is used to simulate the device. When it is activated, the application does not transmit anything to the device but simulates the same operation without error. Therefore, no alarm is raised and all validations are acknowledged.

4.1.5.1 - Activation of simulator mode , Procedure From the {Equipment Installation} application: 1. Select the PC icon in the main window; 2. Select the Edit parameters... command;

Figure 4.6: Activation of Simulator mode

3. Click on the Simulator Enabled button; 4. Click on OK; 5. Rerun the {Equipment Interface} application for the parameter to be acknowledged.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

164

Chapter 4 4.1 - Ergonomic aspects

4.1.5.2 - Simulation of options The presence or absence of options for a device is managed by the {Equipment Installation} application. Simulator mode must be activated beforehand (see previous section). , Procedure to simulate the presence of options From the {Equipment Installation} application: 1. Select the device; 2. Select the Edit parameters... option in the shortcut menu (right mouse click); 3. Select the Simulator tab;

Figure 4.7: Presence of options to simulate

4. Click on the options to simulate; 5. Click on OK; 6. Rerun the {Equipment Interface} application for this parameter to be acknowledged. Note: This information is saved in the servex.ini file located in the installation directory. THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.1 - Ergonomic aspects

165

4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking The lock/unlock function guarantees coherent operation when several stations are being used to operate the device. It is not necessary to lock or even validate when installing or removing a device. These specific operations are immediately acknowledged by the other applications. Subsequent changes can also be made without locking the connection. These are indicated by the ’pencil’ icon and the ’Edited configuration’ message in the status bar as shown in the figure below:

Figure 4.8: Edited configuration

The changes in progress are not necessarily lost during connection locking. The user can choose to save them. Click on , select the Lock device command in the shortcut menu or Tool/Lock all... in the menu bar to display the following dialogue box:

Figure 4.9: "Lock and lose changes?" confirmation request

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

166

Chapter 4 4.1 - Ergonomic aspects

To show whether an application is locked or not, the background colour of the main window is white when it is locked and grey otherwise.

Figure 4.10: View of the window when the application is locked

Figure 4.11: View of the window when the application is unlocked THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.1 - Ergonomic aspects

167

Note: The following screen is displayed when the Ethernet link is not properly connected (disconnected or the equipment is switched off).

Figure 4.12: Availability of the application

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

168

Chapter 4 4.2 - Running software

4.2 - RUNNING SOFTWARE

After starting the WINDOWS session on the operating station PC and opening the directory which contains the “Stand-Alone” applications, the following display appears:

Figure 4.13: Icon display The icons represent the different "Stand-Alone" software applications. The software must be run in the following order: 1. Start the operating session by activating the {Equipment Interface} application by double-clicking on the icon. Notes: 1. To shut down a session, close this application after first closing all other applications. 2. It is recommended to leave this application open as long as the device is being used, even if no other application has been run.

2. Declare the device via the {Equipment Installation} application. This step is unnecessary if the device has already been declared in a previous session. 3. Set the technical configuration for the device (operating parameters, signalling table editing, service creation) from the {Technical Configuration} application. 4. Start the {Monitoring & Redundancy} application to monitor the device. 5. Start the {Download} application to download embedded software. 6. Start the {Event Log} application to view events occurring on the encoder (alarms, reboot, etc.). 7. Start the {Alarm Help} application to understand the meaning of alarms occurring on the encoder.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.2 - Running software

169

Notes: 1. The {Download Embedded Software} application is used by NEXTREAM for downloading embedded software. 2. The {ATM Connect Management} application does not concern the DBE 4110 Encoder.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

170

Chapter 4 4.3 - {Equipment Interface} application

4.3 - {EQUIPMENT INTERFACE} APPLICATION

Foreword: The {Equipment Interface} application handles communication with the device operated from the PC and operations carried out as background tasks (e.g. alarm collection). It is recommended to activate the {Equipment Interface} application (servex.exe) before using any other operating software applications and to remain active as long as the device is operated even if no application is active. Otherwise, an error message appears:

Figure 4.14: Error message when the connection with {Interface Equipements} is not established

If the {Equipment Interface} application is activated after another one, the connection with the application is automatically open. This application do not propose any operation command. It is recommended to close all the applications before leaving the {Equipment Interface} application. Otherwise the following dialogue box appears:

Figure 4.15: Confirmation before leaving the {Interface Equipements} application

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.3 - {Equipment Interface} application

171

Screen layout

menu bar

tool bar

secondary window

main window

Figure 4.16: Screen

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

172

Chapter 4 4.3 - {Equipment Interface} application

• Menu bar Menu

Command

Comment

File

Exit

Quit the application.

Help

About...

Details of software version.

• Tool bar Button

Comment Shows application activity.

• Main window Reserved.

• Secondary window This window gives the list of open applications.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.4 - {Equipment Installation} application

173

4.4 - {EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION} APPLICATION

Foreword: • It is recommended to activate the {Equipment Interface} application (servex.exe) before starting the {Equipment Installation} application, see note in section 4.3 - page 170 and to remain the {Equipment Interface} application active as long as the device is operated, even if no application is active. • It is not necessary to lock the application (or validate) to de-install or install a device. • The language used for the interface can be selected. Screens are available in French or English (see section 4.1.3 - Setting the interface language page 160).

4.4.1 - Purpose and scope of the application The main function of the {Equipment Installation} application is declaring the device. This condition is essential for the device to be configured and supervised from other software applications.

The following sections present the screen layout and the different functions offered by the application. section 4.4.2

Screen layout

section 4.4.3

Declaring the device

section 4.4.4

Cancelling/validating device installation changes

section 4.4.5

Additional device installation commands: . Remove a device, . Change device name and address.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

174

Chapter 4 4.4 - {Equipment Installation} application

4.4.2 - Screen layout

menu bar

tool bar

main window

Figure 4.17: Screen

• Menu bar Menu

Command

Quit Edit

Tool

Help

Comment Quit the application.

Cancel...

Cancel changes and display the last saved configuration (i.e. the active configuration).

Validate...

Confirm changes. The edited configuration is saved, it becomes the active configuration.

Lock all...

Lock all device connections (this command has the same effect as the shortcut Lock device command in Stand-Alone operation), see section 4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking page 165 for details.

Unlock all...

Unlock all device connections (this command has the same effect as the shortcut Unlock device command in Stand-Alone operation), see section 4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking page 165 for details.

About...

Details about software version.

Operating manual...

Open on-line user manuals. see section 4.1.4 - On-line manuals page 162 for details.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.4 - {Equipment Installation} application

175

• Tool bar Button

Comment Quit the application. Cancel changes and display the last saved configuration (i.e. the active configuration). Confirm changes. The configuration is saved. Lock the terminal for the current application. The main window background is white. Unlock the terminal for the current application. The main window background is grey.

• Main window When the application is started up, a list of devices is displayed. This list takes the form of a two-level tree structure and each line is preceded by an icon which facilitates identification of the different device types: • level 1, at the top of the list, features the PC element which is unique and represents the operating PC, • level 2 features the encoder directly operated by the PC through the Ethernet link.

4.4.3 - Declaring the device When the application is activated, the main window contains just the icon of the PC if it is the first time it is being used, or the tree structure of the last saved configuration. If the previous representation is not suitable, it should be deleted (see section 4.4.5.1 - Remove a device page 181) or modified (see section 4.4.5.2 Change device name and address page 181). Note: The IP address of the device must be entered beforehand using the appropriate command on the front panel (menu: Other/Tools/IP Address).

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

176

Chapter 4 4.4 - {Equipment Installation} application

Figure 4.18: Main window in the absence of a previous declaration , Procedure for declaring the device 1. Select the icon representing the PC. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing PC-specific commands. Add a device... Edit parameters...

3. Choose the Add a device... command. A first dialogue box then opens.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.4 - {Equipment Installation} application

177

Figure 4.19: Device parameter fields (type) 4. Select the Digital Broadcast Encoder type and the device model DBE 4110 (DSNG). 5. Click on Next >. A second dialogue box is displayed.

Figure 4.20: Device parameter fields (address) 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

178

Chapter 4 4.4 - {Equipment Installation} application

6. Enter the device’s name and IP address. The device name will be used by the other applications. 7. Click on Finish. The declared device appears in the tree structure with the following information: name, IP address.

Figure 4.21: Main window after declaring the device

Note: The Stand-Alone Control & Command software supplied with the DBE 4110 only allows installation of one DBE 4110.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.4 - {Equipment Installation} application

179

4.4.4 - Cancelling/validating device installation changes 4.4.4.1 - Cancelling changes to device installation , Procedure 1. Select the pull-down Edit menu in the menu bar.

Figure 4.22: Command for cancelling changes 2. Choose the Cancel... command. A dialogue box is then available to confirm that you wish to cancel the changes.

Figure 4.23: Confirmation request 3. Click on OK. After confirmation, the command is executed and the display reflects the device’s active configuration. Note: The

47232437AK01 June 2003

button achieves the same effect.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

180

Chapter 4 4.4 - {Equipment Installation} application

4.4.4.2 - Validating changes to device installation Configuration changes are only effective when validated. , Procedure 1. Select the pull-down Edit menu in the menu bar.

Figure 4.24: Command for validating changes 2. Choose the Validate... command. A dialogue box is then available to confirm changes.

Figure 4.25: Confirmation request 3. Click on OK. After confirmation, the command is executed and the display reflects the device’s active configuration. The lower right-hand edge of the main window now displays the words "Active configuration" and the ’pencil’ icon next to the device has disappeared. Note: The

button achieves the same effect.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.4 - {Equipment Installation} application

181

4.4.5 - Additional device installation commands 4.4.5.1 - Remove a device The command for removing the device is used to cancel declaration of that device. , Procedure 1. Select the device in the tree structure. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. Edit parameters... Remove Lock device Unlock device

3. Choose the Remove command.

4.4.5.2 - Change device name and address This command uses the dialogue box used for device declaration. , Procedure 1. Select the device in the tree structure. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. Edit parameters... Remove Lock device Unlock device

3. Choose the Edit parameters... command.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

182

Chapter 4 4.4 - {Equipment Installation} application

Figure 4.26: Edit device parameters dialogue box (1/2)

Note: The IP address cannot be modified from this dialogue box. To change the IP address it is necessary to de-install, then re-install the device (see section 4.4.3 - Declaring the device page 175) with the new address.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.4 - {Equipment Installation} application

183

The second screen indicates the type of encoder used.

Figure 4.27: Edit device parameters dialogue box (2/2)

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

184

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

4.5 - {TECHNICAL CONFIGURATION} APPLICATION

Foreword: • Before starting the {Technical Configuration} application, it is recommended to activate the {Equipment Interface} application (servex.exe), see note in section 4.3 - page 170. It is recommended to activate this application before using any other operating software applications. • To modify parameters in the application, do not forget to lock the terminal for the current application ( ). The commands are then accessible. The main window background is white. • The language used for the interface can be selected. Screens are available in French or English (see section 4.1.3 - Setting the interface language).

4.5.1 - Purpose and scope of the application The main configuration functions of a DBE 4110 single-service encoder available to the user are as follows: • edit the parameters of the operated device: output frequency, TS packet size, etc.; • declare standard TV, radio, VBI services; • edit video component, audio components, teletext component, private data components; • edit Network Information Table (NIT); • edit Time Offset Table (TOT); • edit descriptors in the PMT and SDT tables; • edit filtering conditions on the TS Input for remultiplexing.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

185

IMPORTANT: In the {Technical Configuration} application, TS bitrates are maximum estimated values used to check that the output multiplex rate is high enough to transmit all the components. Estimated TS bitrates may be slightly higher than the measured ones displayed in the {Monitoring & Redundancy} application, e.g. an estimated 417kbit/s component will be measured at around 407kbit/s.

The following sections present the screen layout and the different functions available with the application. section 4.5.2

Screen layout

section 4.5.3

Device parameters . Encoder operating parameters (advanced parameters), . Modulator parameters, . NIT table, . TOT table, . Saving/Loading a device configuration . Archived configurations, . Cancelling/Validating changes, . Device locking / unlocking

section 4.5.4

Generated Services . TV service, . Editing parameters of the video component, . Editing parameters of the audio component, . Editing parameters of the VBI component, . Editing parameters of the data component, . PMT descriptors, . SDT descriptors, . Advanced Functions, . Shared components, . Ghost components, . Inband command.

section 4.5.5

TS input . First level filtering: stopping/passing the TS input (level 2) . Second level filtering: filtering conditions on the tributary, selecting services and EMM flows (level 3) . Third level filtering: filtering conditions on services (level 4) . Fourth level filtering: filtering conditions on components (level 5)

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

186

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

4.5.2 - Screen layout

menu bar

tool bar

main window

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5

Figure 4.28: Screen

• Menu bar Menu

Command

Quit Edit

Tool

Help

Comment Quit the application.

Cancel...

Cancel changes and display the last saved configuration (i.e. the active configuration).

Validate...

Confirm changes. The edited configuration is saved; it becomes the active configuration.

Lock all...

Lock the device (configuration commands are accessible). See section 4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking for details.

Unlock all...

Unlock the device (configuration commands are not accessible). See section 4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking for details.

Save all...

Save your configurations to file (see following note).

About...

Information about software version.

Operating manual...

Open on-line user manual. See section 4.1.4 - On-line manuals for details.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

187

Note concerning the "Save all" command: This function is used to back up the active configuration of operated devices. The created files can then be reloaded from the {Technical Configuration} application. When the Save all... command is selected in the menu bar, the following dialogue box is displayed for you to define the path to the folder where you want to save your configuration along with any associated comment which will feature in the header of each file. The Browse... button is available for you to select the file location. The program automatically creates a folder, which takes the name of the device, in which configuration files will be saved. The file name always consists of "technical" plus the user-defined suffix (e.g. technical_001.mcf). There is no point in adding an extension as the .mcf extension is added by default. When you have entered the fields, click on OK to confirm and then validate ( button or Edit/Validate... in the menu bar).

Root Path

Suffix

Comment

47232437AK01 June 2003

Root Path is the root directory. The Browse... button is used for selecting another directory from the list of available directories. If the directory entered does not exist, the command fails. Suffix is the text attached to the file name. Do not add the ’_’ character as it will be added automatically. Comment placed in each file. It is displayed on file retrieval.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

188

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

• Tool bar Button

Comment Quit the application. Cancel changes and display the last saved configuration (i.e. the active configuration). Confirm changes. The edited configuration is saved; it becomes the active configuration. Lock the terminal for the current application. The commands are accessible. The main window background is white. Unlock the terminal for the current application. The commands are not accessible (only consultation is possible). The main window background is grey.

• Main window A three level tree view shows the encoder which was pre-installed via the {Equipment Installation} application. • level 1, at the top of the list, represents the encoder, • level 2 represents - a "Generated Services" item that groups together all the services generated locally by the encoder. Under this item are represented: . at level 3: the generated services with indication of their type (TV service, radio service, etc.) and their names, . at level 4: the components with indication of their type (video, audio, VBI, data), their PIDs, their physical sources (board and connector) and their programmed rates. - the "Tributary" or TS item. Under this item are represented: . at level 3: the input TS, . at level 4: the filtered services of the input TS, . at level 5: the filtered components of the filtered services from the input TS and also the attached components (local data component attached to an incoming TS service).

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

189

4.5.3 - Device parameters 4.5.3.1 - Encoder operating parameters (advanced parameters) The application has an Edit advanced parameters... command for displaying and editing the parameters related to general operation of the device. , Procedure 1. Select the device; 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands; Edit advanced parameters... Edit modulator parameters... NIT > TOT > Load device configuration... Save device configuration... Archived configurations... Cancel modifications... Validate modifications... Lock device... Unlock device...

3. Choose the Edit advanced parameters... command.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

190

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

list of items

parameters for item currently selected in the list of items

Figure 4.29: Device configuration dialogue box Owing to the number of parameters, they are grouped into Items. The left-hand part of the dialogue box displays the list of items. Selecting an item displays the associated parameters in the right-hand part of the dialogue box. The OK button confirms the content of all the pages, the Cancel button undoes the changes. Caution: 1. Certain parameters correspond to device sizing. These sizing parameters are used by the device to allocate memory space on device initialisation. If the parameter setting is wrong, more memory may be required than is available. In this event, the device cannot be started up. This is indicated on the front panel of the device. 2. Changes are only effective after validation ( button or Edit/Validate... command in the menu bar) or, for a number of parameters marked by the symbol, after rebooting the device. THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

191

A prompt is then automatically displayed:

Figure 4.30: Reboot dialogue box Select the device (a tick should be displayed in front of the device name) then click on OK.

Figure 4.31: Reboot command

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

192

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

4.5.3.1.1 - “General” item

Figure 4.32: General parameters Purpose: configure the output signal. In the Signalling mode area ISO

Only ISO/MPEG2 tables (PAT, PMT, CAT) are sent in the outgoing signal (in compliance with the MPEG2 ISO 13818-1: “Generic Coding of Moving Pictures and Associated Audio: Systems” standard).

ISO (with NIT in PAT)

If DVB SI signalling is injected by an external device, the encoder generates MPEG2 tables (PAT, PMT, CAT) with mention of the NIT (PID = 16 in decimal) in the PAT.

PSIP terrestrial

Reserved for ATSC. If selected, a PSIP Signalling item replaces DVB Signalling in the left-hand Items list.

PSIP cable

Reserved for ATSC. Same remark as for PSIP terrestrial above.

DVB

The device also generates and transmits DVB tables (NIT, SDT, EIT, TDT, TOT).

Without signalling

The device transmits no signalling.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

193

In the Frequency Area area 50 Hz / 60 Hz

The commands in certain dialogue boxes depend on the chosen standard: video source PAL/SECAM or NTSC if presence of the DPSN or COMPIN board, video resolution, etc.

In the Alarm relay area Alarm relay triggers on major alarms The alarm relay on the MDSL board is activated by major alarms. Alarm relay triggers on major or minor alarms The alarm relay on the MDSL board is activated by major and minor alarms. This area is enabled if the Alarm relay closure hardware option (N41HMSDLAK) has been installed.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

194

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

4.5.3.1.2 - “Output” item

Figure 4.33: Parameters related to output Purpose: set the output signal. In the Output clock area Internally synthesised

The MPEG output signal rate is given by an adjustable internal frequency synthesiser. It is possible, using the Set command two lines below, to optimise the rate by minimising the number of null packets sent by the encoder. The calculation takes into account the values of the component rates generated by the device as well as the rates allocated to signalling and ECM. Notes: 1. If the TS output is exceeded, the component rate must not be increased. If this is the case, firstly reduce the component rate. It is necessary to increase first the TS output and then the component rate. 2. If the Set command does not take into account the Output clock changes when you modify the Max bitrate value. For example:

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

195

- Change the Max bitrate value, - Click on the OK button and close the window, - Open the window and click on Set command, - Validate the changes.

Optimal frequency

Minimum clock frequency of the TS for transmitting the defined service. This frequency can be calculated with the Set button. It can be useful to help recording the TS output on a server.

In the Maximum Bitrates area Signalisation

This value sets the alarm generation threshold and reserves the output rate required to send the signalling. When the equipment output rate is low, it is necessary to make adjustments to optimise the reserved rate. The maximum value is 3Mbit/s.

ECM

Used for alarm generation.

In the TS packet size area, the operator can choose the size of packets multiplexed in the outgoing TS. 188 bytes

This button corresponds to the standardised TS packet size, conforming to the MPEG2 ISO 13818-1: “Generic Coding of Moving Pictures and Associated Audio: Systems” standard.

188+16 bytes

The device adds 16 stuffing bytes after each 188 byte packet. This mode may be used when the device is connected to a satellite or cable modulator. The modulator then replaces these bytes by Reed-Solomon error correcting code. Note: When the ISMB board is used, TS packets must be in 188 + 16 form.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

196

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

4.5.3.1.3 - “Encoders” item

Figure 4.34: Parameters related to encoders Purpose: set internal encoding elements (video, audio, teletext).

In the Service encoder area LTW offset

This parameter (Legal Time Window Offset) indicates to any subsequent multiplexer the procedure for using the Buffer BSmux of decoder model T-STD for that TS flow.

In the Video compression area, the Mode parameter determines the mode which will be used to extract compressed frames from decoder buffers. Leak

Extraction is conditioned by PTS/DTS time stamps.

VBV delay (Video Buffering Verifier) Not available in this version.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

197

In the PCR clock generation area Internal reference

The clock is generated by the encoder’s internal oscillator.

Synchronized on PCR ...

The clock is generated by the encoder’s internal oscillator. The oscillator is synchronised with an incoming PCR on the TS input defined by PID xxxx.

In the Audio delay matching for Multi Encoder Service (MES) area, In the case of Multi-Encoder services, several encoders are cascaded but only one of them generates the video component. The others generate the audio components. The settings for this area adjust the audio delay according to the video delay in the encoder that generates the video component, thus producing correct synchronisation (lipsync). This delay depends on the video encoder’s configuration. This encoder does not generate the MES video component The encoder does not generate the video compenent and the delays defined in the following 2 settings are enabled. Configuring the encoder that generates the MES video: SuperEncoder filtering

Off: The video encoder is not fitted with a SuperEncoder board. with C1P: The first encoding pass function of the SuperEncoder board in the video encoder is enabled. with C1P & RDB: The first encoding pass and Noise Reduction functions of the SuperEncoder board in the video encoder are enabled. without C1P & RDB: The first encoding pass and Noise Reduction functions of the SuperEncoder board in the video encoder are disabled.

Analog video board type defines the analogue video board type used by the video encoder. No analog video board: The video comes from the digital signal. DPSN: The video is injected onto the DPSN board. COMPIN with synchro off: The video is injected onto the COMPIN board with internal board synchronisation. COMPIN with synchro on: The video is injected onto 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

198

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

the COMPIN board and is synchronised by an external signal. In the SuperEncoder Board area, This area is never enabled with a 4110 encoder.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

199

4.5.3.1.4 - “Data injection” item

Figure 4.35: Parameters related to data injection Purpose: set data injection by the TCP DVB protocol.

In the Data or EMM injection using DVB Simulcrypt area Service port

47232437AK01 June 2003

Used for data or EMM injection with the DVB simulcrypt protocol, this field specifies the port used for data injection in TCP mode and bandwidth negotiation in UDP mode. In UDP mode, bandwidth negotiation is optional. Value between 0 and 65535. Default value: 32000. If changed a device reboot is necessary.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

200

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

4.5.3.1.5 - “Scrambler” item

Figure 4.36: Parameters related to scrambler Purpose: scrambling and access control configuration. In the General scrambling area ECM repetition rate

This parameter sets the rate of ECM messages.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

201

4.5.3.1.6 - “SAM card” item

Figure 4.37: Parameters related to SAM card Purpose: generating and authenticating control words. In the SAM card area Detachable

The Detachable SAM card function is not available for encoders and hence greyed out.

Integrated

Generation and authentication of control words is performed by software installed in the equipment which emulates an external SAM card. The set-up of an external SAM card therefore becomes unnecessary.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

202

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

4.5.3.1.7 - “Access control” item

Figure 4.38: Parameters related to Access Control Purpose: assigning Access Control management, irrelevant in a Stand-Alone context. In the Access control area None

The services or components are not subject to Access Control (VIACCESS or SIMULCRYPT).

External

Select this field when the services or components are subject to Access Control (VIACCESS or SIMULCRYPT). Access Control is managed by the DBS 29xx Channel Controller (MCC).

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

203

4.5.3.1.8 - “SIMS” item

Figure 4.39: Parameters related to SIMS Purpose: configure connections between the encoder and a SIMS (Signalisation Information Management System). In the Signalisation Management System Identification area IP Address

Address of the SIMS. The network and sub-network fields must be identical to those in the encoder IP address.

In the Inform SIMS about the broadcast signalisation area No

This command disables the link from the encoder to the SIMS.

Yes

This command enables the link from the encoder to the SIMS. Unless otherwise indicated in the Non standard port field, the link uses standard port 2005.

Non standard port

Text box to input the value of a different port to the standard port.

In the Broadcast SIMS signalisation area No

47232437AK01 June 2003

This command disables the link from the SIMS to the encoder.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

204

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

Yes

This command enables the link from the SIMS to the encoder. Unless otherwise indicated in the Non standard port field, the link uses standard port 2006.

Non standard port

Text box to input the value of a different port to the standard port.

DVB Signalling Master

This command forces insertion of the SDTactual and EIT from the SIMS.

Caution: It is essential that closed socket detection time-out by SIGMA SI is one minute instead of two hours, as by default on a PC. If the time-out remains at two hours, a reset encoder cannot establish a connection with SIGMA until the two hours are up.

4.5.3.1.9 - “Time” item

Figure 4.40: Parameters related to time Purpose: time setting. The time supported by the device is UTC time.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

205

In the Time setting area Manual

Equipment time setting is performed from the commands on the front panel of the device.

Automatic. Set up by messages broadcast on port: Equipment time setting is performed from messages received on the Ethernet link providing UTC time. The messages are sent by the {GALET} UTC Time Broadcaster software installed on the Operating station. {GALET} software is an option. Port 4000 is the default reception port. Automatic. Set up by TDT table received on input: Available for devices featuring the TS input option.

In the Local time offset for front panel area Local time - UTC time

This parameter sets the current difference between local time displayed on the front panel and UTC time.

New offset

Values of time change update.

Valid from (dd/mm/yyyy)

Date of time change update.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

206

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

4.5.3.1.10 - “TBS Signalling” item

Figure 4.41: Parameters related to TBS signalling Purpose: set table broadcasting frequency. In the MDT table area Generate MDT

In order to support the detection of service failure, provide information for remedial measures and efficiently log such events, a transport mechanism, the Multiplex Diagnostic Table (MDT) has been defined by SES (Société Européenne des Satellites). This system will serve to convey diagnostic information about the consistency of all DVB/MPEG-2 multiplexes on ASTRA to the central DINO in Betzdorf. The MDT can be generated by the encoder to signal missing streams (e.g. video, audio, subtitle or accompanied data) or Service Information components (e.g. NIT, SDT, EIT or TDT) within the multiplex.

In the INBAND command parameters area ICT Repetition rate

Repetition rate of the private ICT table used to transport INBAND commands. The default value is 0.5s.

Component stream

Value used by the encoder to indicate the stream type of the INBAND COMMAND components in the service PMTs. The default value is 170.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

207

In the INBAND command management area Execute commands

Check this box if the device is to process or ignore the INBAND commands it receives. Default value: On.

Don't forward commands Check this box if the device is to filter all INBAND commands received. This parameter does not affect INBAND commands created on the device. Default value: On. Notes: The parameters in the INBAND command management and INBAND Splicing command areas are only visible on devices featuring at least one TS input. The Inband command is irrelevant for the DBE 4110 encoder.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

208

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

4.5.3.1.11 - “ISO Signalling” item

Figure 4.42: Parameters related to ISO signalling Purpose: set table broadcasting frequency. This panel is used to set the recurrence of PSI (PAT, PMT, CAT) table transmission in the output signal. In the TS identification area Original_network_id and Transport_stream_id These parameters identify the output flow in a unique way (there must be no two flows with the same Original_network_id/Transport_stream_id). These parameters are inserted in the internal signalling tables and the external source EITactual signalling tables.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

209

4.5.3.1.12 - “DVB Signalling” item

Figure 4.43: Parameters related to DVB signalling Purpose: set table broadcasting frequency. Repetition rates of DVB actual tables area This panel is used to set the recurrence of DVB (NIT, SDT, TOT, BAT, TDT, EITp/f, EITs) table transmission in the output signal. Notes: 1. When a table or sub-table is externally loaded with a defined repetition rate, it is no longer affected by these default values. 2.When a sub-table is loaded in an multiplexer to replace a previous one, the replacement actually happens when the previous equivalent sub-table has been transmitted in full (i.e. after the last section of the sub-table). In the meantime, the new sub-table is stored but not transmitted. In addition, each sub-table has to be sent at least once to avoid discontinuity of version numbers. Various side effects ensue: 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

210

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

- in the intermediate stage, the two sub-tables co-exist and take up space in the device buffers, - if another equivalent sub-table is loaded in the intermediate stage, there will be three sub-tables in the memory, - if EITs (with a very slow broadcast rate) are loaded very quickly, it is possible to end up with a number of equivalent tables at the same time which may require several seconds to clear. For example, when five EIT tables are loaded very quickly (with a repetition rate of 10 seconds), the last one loaded will be transmitted 40 to 50 seconds after loading. 3. Only the EIT_schedule 80 to 84 tables are supported by devices (equivalent to 20 days of programme guide).

Generate TSDT area The TSDT table is an ISO table, the contents of which are defined by DVB. This table is used in DSNG applications where editing of the SI tables in the field may be impossible due to operational problems (compliant with ETS prEN 301 210 standard). The TSDT is used to identify the transmitting satellite station. The station identification parameter entered here is displayed on the front panel of the encoder. Repetition rates of DVB other tables area This panel is used to set the recurrence of DVB other table transmission in the output signal.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

211

4.5.3.1.13 - “PSIP Signalling” item This item is displayed in place of "DVB Signalling" if in the General area the PSIP terrestrial or PSIP cable box is checked. The "PSIP Signalling" item is reserved for standard ATSC.

4. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes).

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

212

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

4.5.3.2 - Modulator parameters , Procedure for editing modulator parameters 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. Edit advanced parameters... Edit modulator parameters... NIT > TOT > Load device configuration... Save device configuration... Archived configurations... Cancel modifications... Validate modifications... Lock device... Unlock device...

3. Choose the Edit modulator parameters... command.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

213

The following dialogue box displays modulator parameters.

Figure 4.44: Modulator parameters The Output parameters area consists of the following fields: Roll-off

Automatic, selects 35% for DVB-QPSK modes and 26% for NTC-8PSK and NTC-16 QAM modes.

Convolution

QPSK 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 6/7, 7/8. 8PSK 2/3, 5/6, 8/9. 16QAM 3/4, 7/8.

IF/RF level

Default value: -20dBm Min: -20dBm. Max: +5dBm Note: the 0.5dBm level step is not managed by the DBS 2930.

Frequency (IF/RF)

Default value: 70MHz Min: 50MHz. Max: 180MHz Note: the 125Hz frequency step is not managed by the DBS 2930.

L_Band level

Default value: -20dBm Min: -20dBm. Max: +5dBm Note: the 0.5dBm level step is not managed by the DBS 2930.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

214

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

Frequency (L_Band)

Default value: 1140MHz Min: 950MHz. Max: 1750MHz Note: the 1kHz frequency step is managed by the DBS 2930.

The Output control area consists of the following fields: Transmission/Modulation

On, Pure carrier or Off.

Spectral inversion

On or Off.

The Information area consists of the following consult fields: Input bitrate, Packet size, Symbol rate, Bandwidth. 4. Click on OK. 5. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes). Two dialogue boxes will then be displayed in turn for you to confirm your entry.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

215

4.5.3.3 - NIT table The {Technical Configuration} application has a function for editing the NITactual (Network Information Table) and different options such as descriptor modification or deletion and saving of tables in file format. The NITactual consists of descriptors related to the actual network (the actual network is the network to which the Transport Stream from the device belongs) and to the various TSs in the network. Descriptors must be added in compliance with the DVB standard set out in the reference document ETS 300 468 "Specification for Service Information (SI) in Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) systems". The NITactual allows decoders to find the list of channels and services belonging to the current network. 4.5.3.3.1 - Edit the NIT

, Procedure 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. Edit advanced parameters... Edit modulator parameters... NIT > TOT > Load device configuration... Save device configuration... Archived configurations... Cancel modifications... Validate modifications... Lock device... Unlock device...

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

216

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

3. Choose the NIT > command. Edit... Save... Load...

4. Choose the Edit... command. A dialogue box will be displayed containing the contents of the table.

Figure 4.45: Editing the NIT The dialogue box contains two parts: • Descriptors: display of descriptors for the network and Transport Streams (TS). • Parameters: display of parameters relating to the item selected in the Descriptors part. Notes: • There is only one Networkactual item. • A NITactual network may contain several TSs. • A Network or TS item can contain several descriptors. THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

217

, Procedure for editing a network descriptor 1. Select the existing Network item in the Descriptors side of the dialogue box (Figure 4.45 page 216). 2. Enter the Network ID in the Parameters side of the dialogue box as required. 3. Click on the Add... button. A new dialogue box is displayed:

Figure 4.46: Add a Descriptor or Transport Stream item 4. Choose the Descriptor option and click on OK. The dialogue box displayed can be used to select the required network descriptor.

Figure 4.47: Editing a descriptor 5. Select the required option. The pull-down Standard option allows a choice between the various descriptors in the dialogue box: network_name, ML_network_name, linkage, private_data_specifier and stuffing. These descriptors are defined in the reference document ETS 300 468 "Specification for Service Information (SI) in Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) systems". Click on OK.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

218

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

The initial dialogue box will display the selected descriptors on the left-hand Descriptors side. 6. Fill in the fields specific to the descriptor. 7. Repeat the last four steps for each required descriptor. 8. Click on OK. 9. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes). Two dialogue boxes will then be displayed in turn for you to confirm your entry.

Editing a Transport Stream descriptor To edit a TS descriptor the TS item has to be created beforehand and then edited via TS item descriptor editing.

, Procedure to create the Transport Stream item 1. Select the Network item on the Descriptors side of the dialogue box (Figure 4.45 page 216). 2. Click on the Add... button. 3. Choose the Transport stream option in the dialogue box (Figure 4.46) and click on OK. The Original Network ID set by default is that of the network. The TS ID entered must be between 1 and 65535.

, Procedure to edit or add a descriptor in the TS item 1. Select the TS item on the Descriptors side of the dialogue box (Figure 4.45 page 216). 2. Click on the Add... button. 3. Choose the Descriptor option in the dialogue box (Figure 4.46) and click on OK. 4. Choose one of the various descriptors that appears in the dialogue box: cable_delivery, satellite_delivery, terrestrial_delivery, frequency_list, private_data_specifier, service_list and stuffing. These descriptors are defined in the reference document ETS 300 468 "Specification for Service Information (SI) in Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) systems". Click on OK. THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

219

5. Fill in the fields specific to the descriptor. 6. Repeat the last four steps for each required descriptor. 7. Click on OK. 8. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes).

4.5.3.3.2 - Changing descriptors

, Procedure for changing a network or TS descriptor 1. Select the descriptor to be changed in the Descriptors part of the dialogue box (Figure 4.45 page 216). 2. Change the parameters in the right-hand Parameters part of the dialogue box. 3. Click on OK. 4. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes). Two dialogue boxes will then be displayed in turn for you to confirm your entry.

4.5.3.3.3 - Deleting descriptors

, Procedure for deleting a network descriptor 1. Select the descriptor to be deleted in the Descriptors part of the dialogue box (Figure 4.45 page 216). 2. Click on the Remove... button. 3. Click on OK. 4. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes).

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

220

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

4.5.3.3.4 - Saving/Loading a NIT When the new configuration is activated, the NIT is inserted in the TS output flow. This table is stored by the equipment. The application offers the additional possibility of saving the NITs in file format (save on PC or another storage medium) as, for example, when upgrading the software version, the saved memory is reset and the previous configuration is lost for the saved NIT. The NIT then requires reloading from the {Technical Configuration} application.

, Procedure for saving a NIT 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. Edit advanced parameters... Edit modulator parameters... NIT > TOT > Load device configuration... Save device configuration... Archived configurations... Cancel modifications... Validate modifications... Lock device... Unlock device...

3. Choose the NIT... command. Edit... Save... Load...

4. Choose the Save... command. A dialogue box is displayed to enter the parameters required for saving the file, i.e. the file name and a comment associated with the file. THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

221

Figure 4.48: Saving a NIT There is no point in giving a file extension, as the software adds the extension (.dvb) to all saved NIT files. The file will be saved in the directory indicated in the dialogue box. The directory can be changed by clicking on the Browse... button.

, Procedure for loading a NIT 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. Edit advanced parameters... Edit modulator parameters... NIT > TOT > Load device configuration... Save device configuration... Archived configurations... Cancel modifications... Validate modifications... Lock device... Unlock device...

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

222

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

3. Choose the NIT... command. Edit... Save... Load...

4. Choose the Load... command. A dialogue box is displayed for choosing the saved file to be used.

Figure 4.49: Loading a saved file The dialogue box shows the configurations available in the current directory.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

223

4.5.3.4 - TOT table The TOT is a DVB signalling table which gives the offsets between local time and UTC time for a list of countries. This table must be changed before the clocks change from summer to winter time and vice versa. 4.5.3.4.1 - Edit the TOT

, Procedure 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. Edit advanced parameters... Edit modulator parameters... NIT > TOT > Load device configuration... Save device configuration... Archived configurations... Cancel modifications... Validate modifications... Lock device... Unlock device...

3. Choose the TOT > command. Edit... Save... Load...

4. Choose the Edit... command.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

224

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

A dialogue box will be displayed containing the contents of the table.

Figure 4.50: Editing the TOT When creating a TOT it is necessary to declare a Local time offset descriptor, a list of time offsets will be associated. In a list, the number of elements is limited to 13.

, Procedure for adding a TOT descriptor 1. Click on the Add... button. 2. A second dialogue box is displayed:

Figure 4.51: Add a descriptor

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

225

3. Click on OK to add the Local time offset descriptor to the list. The previous dialogue box will then display the descriptor on the left-hand side as shown below:

Figure 4.52: Editing the TOT 4. Click on Add... in the right-hand panel. A dialogue box will be displayed for you to select the country concerned. Edit the parameters and click on OK.

Figure 4.53: Adding a time offset The country and its details will be added to the list of time offsets in the previous dialogue box. Click on OK.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

226

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

For the Country field, a list of countries is given by default. But it is possible to type three characters for the country code which is not proposed in the list. The lists of default language and country codes can be customised to include additional languages or countries or restrict default lists to the most common choices. These lists can be customised by changing the content of the codes.ini text file in the DBS 2930 setup directory. When language or country codes are defined in this file, the DBS 2930 uses these instead of the default lists regardless of the version (French or English) of the DBS 2930. The order in which codes are declared sets the order in which they appear in the choice lists. The file format observes Windows .ini file syntax.

Example of a .ini file [country_code] FRA=France [ISO_639_language_code] est=Estonien fre=Français

The [country_code] section contains the country codes. The name of each key is the ISO 8859-1 three-character code for the country. Its value is the text to be displayed in the list of choices. The [ISO_639_language_code] section contains the language codes. The name of each key is the ISO 639 three-character code for the language. Its value is the text to be displayed in the list of choices. Lines not observing the specified syntax are ignored.

5. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes).

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

227

The procedure for changing and deleting descriptors is similar to that explained for the NIT. 4.5.3.4.2 - Changing descriptors

, Procedure for changing a TOT descriptor 1. Select the descriptor to be changed in the Descriptors part of the dialogue box (Figure 4.52 page 225). 2. Click on Edit... and change the parameters in the right-hand List of time offsets part of the dialogue box. 3. Click on OK. 4. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes). Two dialogue boxes will then be displayed in turn for you to confirm your entry.

4.5.3.4.3 - Deleting descriptors

, Procedure for deleting a TOT descriptor 1. Select the descriptor to be deleted in the Descriptors part of the dialogue box (Figure 4.52 page 225). 2. Click on Remove. 3. Click on Yes to confirm your choice. 4. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes).

The TOT table saving and loading functions are identical to those for the NIT (see section 4.5.3.3.4 - Saving/Loading a NIT page 220) except that the TOT > command is used instead of NIT >. As for NITs, the application offers the additional possibility of saving the TOTs in file format (save on PC or another storage medium) as, for example, when upgrading the software version, the saved memory is reset and the previous configuration is lost for the saved TOT. The TOT then requires reloading from the {Technical Configuration} application. 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

228

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

4.5.3.5 - Saving/Loading a device configuration The active configuration is stored by the equipment. The application offers the additional possibility of saving all edited configurations (not necessarily activated) in file format (save on PC or another storage medium).

, Procedure to save a configuration 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. Edit advanced parameters... Edit modulator parameters... NIT > TOT > Load device configuration... Save device configuration... Archived configurations... Cancel modifications... Validate modifications... Lock device... Unlock device...

3. Choose the Save device configuration... command. A dialogue box is displayed to enter the parameters required for the saved file, i.e the file name and a comment associated with the file.

Figure 4.54: Saving a configuration THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

229

There is no point in giving a file extension as the software adds the same extension (.mcf) to all saved files. The file will be saved in the directory specified in the dialogue box. The directory can be changed by clicking on the Browse... button.

, Procedure to load a configuration 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. Edit advanced parameters... Edit modulator parameters... NIT > TOT > Load device configuration... Save device configuration... Archived configurations... Cancel modifications... Validate modifications... Lock device... Unlock device...

3. Choose the Load device configuration... command.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

230

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

A dialogue box is displayed to choose the configuration to use.

Figure 4.55: Loading a device configuration The dialogue box shows the configurations available in the current directory. The Browse... button can be used to change directories. Configurations are presented in list form. For each configuration the following is displayed: • the name of the file saved, • the comment made by the operator when the file was saved.

4.5.3.6 - Archived configurations This menu is used to: • configure the device with configurations stored in the memory, • save configurations, • erase saved configurations. Caution: The operator is recommended to save all configurations on PC in addition to those saved on the DBE 4110. If software is installed subsequently, configurations on the DBE 4110 may be lost, in which case those saved on PC can be restored to the device using the Control & Command software.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

231

, Procedure for saving, recalling or clearing configurations 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. Edit advanced parameters... Edit modulator parameters... NIT > TOT > Load device configuration... Save device configuration... Archived configurations... Cancel modifications... Validate modifications... Lock device... Unlock device...

3. Choose the Archived configurations... command.

Figure 4.56: Archived configurations

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

232

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

The Configuration area consists of the following fields: Name

Enter the name of the configuration. It is also possible to select the number of the configuration directly.

Save

Save a current configuration.

Recall

Recall a saved configuration.

Clear

Clear a saved configuration.

" Concerning the factory-installed configurations

The encoder has three factory-installed configurations accessible by the Recall command and saved in memories A (SNG-LBR), B (SNG-HBR) and C (LBR+DATA), which cannot be cleared. These configurations serve as a base from which users can easily develop their own configurations. Note: Not all encoder parameters are set in the factory installed configurations. For example, 50/60 Hz mode is not taken into account.

The following table gives the values of the parameters taken into account by factory-set configurations SNG-LBR, SNG-HBR and LBR-DATA.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

SERVICE

VIDEO

AUDIO1&2

DATA

TRANSMISSION

47232437AK01 June 2003

233

A (SNG-LBR)

B (SNG-HBR)

C (LBR+DATA)

Service ID

100

100

100

PMT PID

257

257

257

PCR PID

100

100

100

Type

Digital TV Service (1)

Digital TV Service (1)

Digital TV Service (1)

Name

TV

TV

TV

Provider name

None

None

None

Scrambling

Clear mode

Clear mode

Clear mode

Source

4:2:0 MP@ML

4:2:2@ML

4:2:0 MP@ML

PID

100

100

100

Bit Rate

7.6 Mbit/s

20 Mbit/s

9 Mbit/s

Coding

No low delay

No low delay

No low delay

Input

SDI

SDI

SDI

Resolution

720x576

720x576

720x576

GOP

12

12

12

IP frame

3

3

3

Aspect ratio

4/3

4/3

4/3

Input

Analog

Analog

Analog

PID audio 1

110

110

110

PID audio 2

111

111

111

Bit rate

256 kbit/s

384 kbit/s

256 kbit/s

Type

Stereo

Stereo

Stereo

Coding

MPEG1 Layer 2

MPEG1 Layer 2

MPEG1 Layer 2

PID

Not used

Not used

103

Baud rate

Not used

Not used

9600

Stream type

Not used

Not used

0x80

Symbol rate

6.111 Ms/s

23.333 Ms/s

6.666 Ms/s

Modulation

QPSK

QPSK

QPSK

Code rate

3/4

7/8

7/8

Roll Off

Auto

Auto

Auto

Level

-15 dBm

-15 dBm

-15 dBm

Output

Off Air

Off Air

Off Air

Spectral inversion

Off

Off

Off

Packet size

188

188

204

IF frequency

70 MHz

70 MHz

70 MHz

L-band

1140 MHz

1140 MHz

1140 MHz

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

234

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

A confirmation request is displayed when recalling an archived configuration.

Figure 4.57: Confirmation request

The following dialogue box is then displayed.

Figure 4.58: Validation dialogue box

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

235

4.5.3.7 - Cancelling/Validating changes These commands are used to cancel or confirm changes to a device configuration.

, Procedure for cancelling changes 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. Edit advanced parameters... Edit modulator parameters... NIT > TOT > Load device configuration... Save device configuration... Archived configurations... Cancel modifications... Validate modifications... Lock device... Unlock device...

3. Choose the Cancel modifications... command. The following dialogue box is displayed:

4. Click on OK. After confirmation, the command is run and the display reflects the device’s active configuration. Note: The same effect.

47232437AK01 June 2003

button or the Edit/Cancel... command in the menu bar achieve the

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

236

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

, Procedure for validating changes 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. Edit advanced parameters... Edit modulator parameters... NIT > TOT > Load device configuration... Save device configuration... Archived configurations... Cancel modifications... Validate modifications... Lock device... Unlock device...

3. Choose the Validate modifications... command. The following dialogue box is displayed.

4. Click on OK. After confirmation, the command is run and the display reflects the device’s active configuration. The lower right-hand edge of the main window now displays the words "Active configuration" and the ’pencil’ icon next to the device has disappeared. Note: The same effect.

button or the Edit/Validate... command in the menu bar achieve the

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

237

4.5.3.8 - Device locking / unlocking For details on this function, please refer to 4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking page 165.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

238

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

4.5.4 - Generated Services The Generated Services item located underneath the encoder groups together the services generated locally.

Figure 4.59: Generated Services The Create a new service... command allows the encoder to generate services such as TV, radio, mosaic, VBI data, EMM (Entitlement Management Message) or NVOD (Near Video On Demand). There are 4 types of components: video, audio, VBI and data. The following table contains the restrictions for assigning components to services. The number of components is also limited by the component resources available to the DBE 4110. Service

Components video

audio

VBI

data

TV

1

1 or more

0 to 4

0 or more

Radio

0

1 or more

0

0 or more

VBI data

0

0

1

0 or more

Note: The maximum number of audio components is imposed by the encoder model.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

239

4.5.4.1 - TV service The procedure for creating a TV service using 4 components is as follows: 1. Select Generated Services under the device in the tree structure. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. Create a new service... Manage ghost components Not manage ghost components

3. Choose the Create a new service... command. A dialogue box will be displayed to enter the type of service.

Figure 4.60: Generate a new service Given the number of parameters to enter, the box contains several panels in succession accessible via the Next> and button is used to go to the next panel. The
THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

240

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

4. In the dialogue box, select the service type TV. 5. Click on Next>. A dialogue box is displayed to enter parameters relating to the service.

Figure 4.61: Service parameter entry The Signalisation area contains the following fields: Service id

Service identifier. The generation of a local service can result in a transiting service being stopped. This is the case when the service ID required has already been allocated to a transiting service. When the service is stopped the AID_SRV_ID_CONFLICT alarm is raised. It is not possible to generate a service locally with service_id 0xFFFF.

Type

Select the service type from TV, Radio, Mosaic, Teletext, NVOD reference and NVOD item.

Name and Provider

The decoder uses these character strings to display to the user the name of the service and the service provider.

Present and following (EIT)When the EIT present/following flag is set in the SDT table, this field informs the decoders of the presence or absence of information (Electronic programme guide) THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

241

about the "present" and "following" events of the service. This private data information is provided by an external device and transported in the MPEG2/DVB stream via EITs (Event Information Tables). Schedule events (EITs)

Same comment as above but concerning "scheduled" events, i.e. those after the "following" event.

The Multiplex area contains the following fields: Running status

This field offers several broadcasting types. This parameter is used to insert (or not, as appropriate) the service and its components in the outgoing TS and affects the Running Status field in the SDT indicating service status. When the running status is off, the corresponding service will not be output.

PID PMT

PID in which the PMT describing the service will be inserted (a default figure is provided). Services may use PID PMTs specific to each one or a PID PMT common to all of them.

PID PCR

PID in which the reference clock PCR is transmitted. The PID of the component carrying the PCR is called Service PID.

6. Enter the various parameters in the dialogue box. 7. Click on Next>. A new dialogue box is displayed to select the components to be assigned to the service.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

242

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

Figure 4.62: Selection of TV service components It is possible to select several components. 8. In the Available components box, select the required component(s) (check boxes). 9. Click on OK to confirm the selection made in the three dialogue boxes. The service created, and its components, are displayed in the main window.

Figure 4.63: Created service display THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

10. Confirm your choice by clicking on the

243

button.

4.5.4.1.1 - Editing parameters of the video component

, Procedure 1. Select the video component. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the componentspecific commands. Edit parameters... Remove component... Edit additional PMT info...

3. Choose the Edit parameters... command. The dialogue box displayed is made up of three panels plus an additional Acquisition panel if the COMPIN board is used.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

244

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

General parameters panel

Figure 4.64: Entry of video component parameters (General parameters) The Source and Profile parameters have the following values: Source

Choice between • SDI, • DPSN/PAL BDGHI if 50Hz frequency is set in the Edit advanced parameters panel, see section 4.5.3.1.1 - “General” item page 192, • DPSN/SECAM if 50Hz frequency is set in the Edit advanced parameters panel, • NTSC M if 60Hz frequency is set in the Edit advanced parameters panel, • PATTERN.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

245

Note: The COMPIN composite video acquisition board gives access to more acquisition parameters than a DPSN board. When configuring a video component, the list of sources is extended and an additional Acquisition page is displayed. See page 252 for information on this page.

If COMPIN board is used, the following additional sources are available: • COMPIN/PAL BDGHI in 50 Hz (as shown in Figure 4.65), • COMPIN/NTSC in 60 Hz (as shown in Figure 4.66).

Figure 4.65: COMPIN/PAL BDGHI option in 50Hz

Figure 4.66: COMPIN/NTSC option in 60Hz

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

246

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

Notes: 1. When the Pattern source is selected, the internal PLL is no longer locked onto the video input, but to a fixed internal frequency. In these conditions, the SDI audio source transmitted with the video signal could give rise to alarms due to synchronisation problems, thereby creating disturbance in the sound signal. 2. There is no test to check whether the same PID is used as the output PID of two transiting components. PID instructions are considered to be instruction opportunities and only apply when the components do indeed feature on input. If however, the two components were to exist at the same time, one of them would be stopped and an alarm raised.

Profile

Choice between MP@ML and 422P@ML.

The Multiplex parameters area has the following fields: PID

Identification of the TS packets transporting the video component.

PCR

Choice between • No PCR: the component does not carry the PCR, • Service PCR: the component is referenced to carry the service PCR. In this case, the PID of this component fills the PCR PID field in the Service dialogue box (Figure 4.61 page 240), • Contains a PCR: the component carries a PCR without being referenced to carry the Service PCR. In this case, each component of the service can carry the PCR. These facilities mean that in remultiplexing operations, a TV service containing one video and several audios may be split into one TV service and several radio services each containing a single audio only.

Off air

This field is used to suspend transmission of the component without erasing it from the configuration.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

247

The Compression area has the following fields: Rate

value between 0.5 and 15 Mb/s if MP@ML. value between 0.5 and 50 Mb/s if 4:2:2 P@ML. The operator can now set a video bitrate lower than the minimum bitrate indicated in the DBE 41xx encoder technical specifications. However, in any case an input of under 0.5 Mbit/s is rejected. When exiting the video parameter editing screen, a warning message requests the operator to confirm settings. The message specifies the minimum bitrate recommended by NEXTREAM for information purposes (i.e. 2 Mbit/s).

Figure 4.67: Warning message Mode

The mode optimises video compression. In Film mode, encoding and motion prediction are forced to frame mode because there is no motion between the 2 interleaved fields making up the frame. In Video mode, encoding and motion prediction are forced to field mode. In Auto mode, the encoder itself sets the best mode (film or video) having analysed the two interleaved fields. Only auto mode is capable of correct processing of a 3:2 pull down film mode (60Hz).

Format

Choice between • Manual: format specified by the field Default value 4:3 or 16:9, • Automatic WSS: format assignment depends on the WSS (Wide Screen Signaling) information contained in the incident 4:2:2 video signal. In case of non-

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

248

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

reception of the WSS signal, the format is specified by the field Default value 4:3 or 16:9. Note: With an SDI source transporting WSS in digital form (DID/SDID), you must declare the digital WSS in one of the VBI components (see section 4.5.4.1.3 - Editing parameters of the VBI component page 264). In any other case, it is all done automatically.

• Automatic AFD: format assignment depends on the AFD (Automatic Format Description) information contained in the incident 4:2:2 video signal. In case of non-reception of the AFD signal, the format is specified by the field Default value 4:3 or 16:9. Note: The AFD, also known as ARD, was defined by the BBC. It is the modified "video index" (line 11 and 324 in 50 Hz and 14 and 277 in 60 Hz) which supplies, among other things, information on image format (4:3, 16:9). The AFD can only be received in a video from the SDI input. The Aspect ratio default value is used until the AFD data has been received. Once the AFD has been detected, the image format is determined by the AFD data. Unlike WSS, when the AFD data disappears, the image format keeps the format contained in the AFD (it does not revert to the default format).

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

249

Advanced parameters panel

Figure 4.68: Entry of video component parameters (Advanced parameters) The Compression area has the following fields: P picture period (M) and GOP size (N) The P picture period (M) parameter, from 1 to 3 and always less than the N parameter, defines the recurrence of non-bidirectional pictures (P pictures). Note: In low delay mode, the P picture period (M) parameter is forced to 1.

The GOP size (N) parameter, from M value to 24, defines recurrence of Intra pictures (I pictures). Examples of GOP M/N with B referring to bidirectional predicted pictures: GOP M=3, N=12: IBBPBBPBBPBBI GOP M=1, N=4: IPPPI 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

250

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

Picture resolution

This field allows the picture resolution to be reduced in the event of a low video rate. The picture resolution depends on the picture rate: In 50 Hz, 352 pixels x 288 lines 352 pixels x 576 lines 480 pixels x 576 lines 544 pixels x 576 lines 704 pixels x 576 lines 720 pixels x 576 lines In 60 Hz, 352 pixels x 240 lines 352 pixels x 480 lines 480 pixels x 480 lines 544 pixels x 480 lines 704 pixels x 480 lines 720 pixels x 480 lines

Compression delay

Normal, Low or Ultra low (flag in the TS packet header).

Use closed GOP mode

The first B pictures of a GOP (just after intra pictures) are predicted with "backward-only" mode in order to allow bitstream editing.

PES info

Define the Priority (Normal or High), Copyright (With or Without) and Content (Original or Copy) (flag in the TS packet header) for PES information.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

251

Optimal configurations: 1. Normal mode MP@ML Max bit rate

422@ML

15 Mb/s

50 Mb/s

Min recommended bit rate / Min bitrate allowed

720 pixels: 2 Mb/s / 0.5Mb/s 702 pixels: 2 Mb/s / 0.5Mb/s 544 pixels: 1.5 Mb/s / 0.5Mb/s 480 pixels: 1.5 Mb/s / 0.5Mb/s 352 pixels: 1 Mb/s / 0.5Mb/s SIF: 1 Mb/s (regardless of GOP structure) / 0.5Mb/s

4 Mb/s (regardless of GOP structure)

Optimal GOP structure

bit rate<8 Mb/s: 12/3 bit rate>8 Mb/s: 12/2

4Mb/s30Mb/s: 2/1

2. Low delay mode (for remote interviews) MP@ML

422@ML

Max bit rate

15 Mb/s

50 Mb/s

Min recommended bit rate / Min bitrate allowed

4 Mb/s / 0.5Mb/s

6 Mb/s / 0.5Mb/s

Optimal GOP structure

12/1

6Mb/s30Mb/s: 2/1

3. Ultra low delay mode MP@ML

422@ML

Max bit rate

15 Mb/s

50 Mb/s

Min recommended bit rate / Min bitrate allowed

6 Mb/s 0.5Mb/s

6 Mb/s 0.5Mb/s

Fixed GOP structure

1/1

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

252

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

Notes: 1. The low delay software option (N41SLODE), installed as standard, is required for access to Ultra Low Delay mode. 2. When Ultra Low Delay mode is activated, sound and image synchronisation is not guaranteed with audio components from AMUSE boards. In addition, M and N parameters are forced to 1 (the video contains only I images).

Acquisition parameters panel

Figure 4.69: Entry of video component parameters (Acquisition parameters) The Analog video conversion area has the following fields: VTR mode

Check the box if the composite signal comes from a VTR not featuring a TBC (Time Base Corrector) or if it is very poor quality. Default value: Off.

External synchro

Check the box to enable the internal frame

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

253

synchroniser. Default value: Off

The NTSC conversion area has the following fields: Check the Standard pedestal box if the NTSC signal features a pedestal as per ITU-R 470 standard. Default value: Standard pedestal. This parameter is only visible if the source is COMPIN/NTSC.

VBI parameters panel

Figure 4.70: Entry of video component parameters (VBI parameters)

Use VITC/DVITC

47232437AK01 June 2003

The VITC/DVITC information contains a time-code. After extraction from the video field blanking (digital or analogue) the VITC/DVITC is transmitted in the THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

254

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

MPEG2 video component. The DVITC must be carried by one line only (between line 6 and line 22). Notes: 1. The N41SVBIP (VBI Processing) option is required to obtain this function. 2. VITC/DVITC in DID/SDID form cannot be processed by the encoder.

4. Enter the various parameters in the dialogue boxes and click on OK.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

255

4.5.4.1.2 - Editing parameters of the audio component , Procedure 1. Select the audio component. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the componentspecific commands. Edit parameters... Remove component... Edit additional PMT info...

3. Choose the Edit parameters... command. A dialogue box is displayed allowing parameters relating to the audio component to be edited. General audio panel

Figure 4.71: Entry of audio component (general parameters)

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

256

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

The Source area consists of the following fields: Source and Group/Channel (the latter only if the SDI source is selected): The source of the signal to be processed depends on • the audio component number, • presence of the AMuSE board, • presence of the ATADI board. Note: It is possible to configure the audio components using the compressors of the AMUSE board to produce an audio test signal. To do this, select Pattern in the list of sources in the audio component parameter editing screen.

The audio sources are summarised in the following table:

Component

Encoder name Board/Audio compressor

Possible source

Mandatory conditions

Audio 1

[SSEB/AUD1]

SDI /Group x/Channel 1 Analog 1 PATTERN ATADI/Balanced 1 ATADI/Unbalanced 1

ATADI present ATADI present

SDI /Group x/Channel 2 Analog 2 PATTERN ATADI/Balanced 2 ATADI/Unbalanced 2

ATADI present ATADI present

Audio 2

[SSEB/AUD2]

Audio 3

[AMU2/AUD1]

SDI/Group u/Channel 1 Balanced 1 Unbalanced 1

AMUSE present in slot 2 AMUSE present in slot 2 AMUSE present in slot 2

Audio 4

[AMU2/AUD2]

SDI/Group u/Channel 2 Balanced 2 Unbalanced 2

AMUSE present in slot 2 AMUSE present in slot 2 AMUSE present in slot 2

Audio 5

[AMU2/AUD3]

SDI/Group v/Channel 1 Balanced 3 Unbalanced 3

AMUSE present in slot 2 AMUSE present in slot 2 AMUSE present in slot 2

Audio 6

[AMU2/AUD4]

SDI/Group v/Channel 2 Balanced 4 Unbalanced 4

AMUSE present in slot 2 AMUSE present in slot 2 AMUSE present in slot 2

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

257

Note concerning the audio source names from the SDI input. An SDI signal can contain up to 16 mono audio channels. Two mono audios constitute an AES/EBU channel. AES/EBU channels are grouped in pairs and each pair forms a group. The reference of the AES/EBU channel is made up of the group number (1 to 4) and the number of the AES/EBU channel in the pair (1 or 2). Mono

Stereo

Groups

Audio 1/1 Audio 1/2

Group 1

Audio 2/1 Audio 2/2

Group 2

Audio 3/1 Audio 3/2

Group 3

Audio 4/1 Audio 4/2

Group 4

Comments: 1. SSEB board: The SSEB board includes 2 stereo audio compressors, thus enabling two stereo audios in the output signal (stereo audios 1 and 2). The possible sources for the each stereo audio are as follows: • the SSEB board SDI input; • the SSEB board analogue input. When the SDI input is selected, a group number must be supplied. This number identifies the group to which the stereo audio belongs. When the source of the two stereo audios 1 and 2 is SDI, SSEB board internal wiring requires both stereo audios to be taken from the same group (one de-embedder for each pair of stereo audios).

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

258

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

2. ATADI board (option N41HATADAK): When this board is present, the list of possible sources for the audio 1 and audio 2 components contains two additional options: • the balanced digital input; • the unbalanced digital input. When the audio 1 and 2 source is a digital input, ATADI board internal wiring requires both inputs to be of the same type (Balanced or Unbalanced). 3. AMuSE board (option N41HAMUBAK): The AMuSE board is now dual-standard, i.e. MPEG-1 Layer II and Dolby AC-3. It is capable of packetising up to four Dolby AC-3 sounds from external audio encoders, or up to four sounds in MPEG-1 Layer II standard It is not possible to combine MPEG-1 Layer II encoding and Dolby AC-3 packetising with the same AMuSE board. The four audio channels on the AMuSE board are configured in either MPEG-1 Layer II or Dolby AC-3. In both cases, for each audio, the source options are as follows: the AMuSE board SDI input; the AES balanced digital input; the AES unbalanced digital input. When SDI input is selected, a group number must be supplied. This number identifies the group to which the audio component belongs. Some restrictions apply: 1. When the audio compressor 1 and 2 sources come from the SDI signal, internal wiring of the AMuSE board requires selection of the same group for the two sources. This rule also applies to compressor 3 and 4 sources. The SDI source (with AC-3 audio) must be synchronous with the one sent to the video encoder (SSEB board). 2. When the audio compressor sources are AES digital inputs, internal wiring of the AMuSE board requires all AES inputs to be of the same type (balanced or unbalanced). When either of these sources is used, the external Dolby encoder must be genlocked through the synchronisation output from the REF OUT connector on the AMuSE board. 4. PATTERN signal: The audio test signal consists in the transmission of a 2100 Hz frequency signal at 0 dBFS (full scale level). Be careful when using the audio test signal, as it produces a very loud sound. Note: In pre-compressed AC-3 mode, the AMuSE board does not generate an internal audio test signal.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

259

The Multiplex area has the following fields: PID

Identification of the TS packets transporting the audio component.

PCR

Choice between • No PCR: the component does not carry the PCR, • Service PCR: the component is referenced to carry the service PCR. In this case, the PID of this component fills the PCR PID field in the Service dialogue box (Figure 4.61 page 240), • Contains a PCR: the component carries a PCR without being referenced to carry the Service PCR. In this case, each component of the service can carry the PCR. These facilities mean that in remultiplexing operations, a radio service containing several audios may be split into several radio services each containing a single audio only.

Off air

This field is used to suspend transmission of the component without erasing it from the configuration.

The Compression area has the following fields: Standard

MPEG1 Layer II or Dolby AC-3. The Dolby standard is only available when an audio component has been selected from the AMuSE board.

Mode

Stereo, Joint stereo, Mono or Dual channel. Note concerning activation of Dual PID mode for Monophonic Audio Channels. 1. In the main {Technical Configuration} window select or add a first audio component from a compressor on the SSEB board (SSEB/AUD1 or SSEB/AUD2); 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device specific commands; 3. Choose the Edit parameters... command; 4. Set the audio component mode to Mono left or Mono right; 5. Add a new component (using Add components... in the shortcut menu); 6. Select the same compressor. The component’s mode will automatically be set to mono-left if the first is in monoright and vice versa. The two components are transported

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

260

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

in TS packets with distinct PIDs. Any change made to the compression parameters (Source, VPS, Alignment level, Headroom, Additional delay ("Advanced" window below) applies to both components. To change an audio mono-left or mono-right component to an audio stereo, joint-stereo or dual channel component, the other mono component must be deinstalled.

Rate

Choice between 64kb/s, 96kb/s, 128kb/s, 192kb/s, 256kb/s and 384kb/s according to the mode (MPEG standard does not allow any Mode/Rate combination).

VPS automatic mode

In MPEG Layer II compression mode, VPS information contained in the incident 4:2:2 video signal can be used to control automatic selection of the audio mode and the bitrate. When automatic VPS mode is validated, the input values in the Compression mode fields are default values that are only applied in the absence of VPS information. Note: With an SDI source transporting VPS in digital form (DID/SDID), you must declare the digital VPS in one of the VBI components (see section 4.5.4.1.3 - Editing parameters of the VBI component page 264). In any other case, it is all done automatically.

Alignment level and Headroom For analogue audio source only: The maximum input level is the analogue level in dBU with input saturation. After conversion, a digital level of 0 dBFS is produced. Two parameters are used to set the maximum input level: alignment level and headroom. Alignment is the level in dBU which corresponds to 0VU. It can be set between 0 and 4 dBU in 1 dBU steps. Headroom is the difference in dB between alignment level and input saturation. It can be set between 8 and 20 dB in 1 dB steps. Physically, the analogue audio input saturation level corresponds to alignment level + headroom in dBU.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

261

For example, the alignment level is +4dBU and the headroom 20dB, the 0 dBFS corresponds to +24 dBU. Advanced audio panel

Figure 4.72: Entry of audio component (advanced parameters) Additional delay

47232437AK01 June 2003

This parameter is used to adjust the phase of the audio component with respect to the video component. The additional delay is used to recover a correct lipsync when a non-standard decoder is used. The accuracy of the value in ms is not guaranteed. Do not use the additional delay to compensate bad audio/video synchronisation of the encoder service signal. Please reboot the DBE 4110 after changing the additional delay. The additional delay should remain set to 0, which corresponds to a correct lipsync (tested with an MSU 4422 decoder). However, in certain conditions the TS bitrate used by THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

262

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

audio components from an AMUSE board can be reduced by adjusting the Additional Delay setting. TS packetisation is optimised when this parameter is set to +350 ms (see table below).

IO bitrate (kbit/s)

TS bitrate (kbit/s) SSEB audio

AMUSE audio Additional Delay < 50ms

Additional Delay = 350ms

64

70

125

70

128

135

186

135

192

205

250

205

This change is only possible when an MPEG 1 Layer II coded audio component is attached to a service not containing any video component (radio service for instance). The Additional Delay parameter can then be set between –50ms and +350ms instead of 50ms/+50ms. The DBS 2930 performs the following checks: - when editing the parameters of an audio component, the value of the Additional Delay parameter is checked; - when adding a component to a service, addition of a video component is rejected if the service contains an audio component from an AMuSE board with an Additional Delay value of above 50ms.

Figure 4.73: Error message

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

PES info

263

Define the Copyright (With or Without) or Content (Original or Copy) (flag in the TS packet header) for PES information.

4. Enter the various parameters in the dialogue box. 5. Click on OK.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

264

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

4.5.4.1.3 - Editing parameters of the VBI component The encoders can extract certain VBI data from the incident video signal and transmit them in one to four VBI components in DVB form with different PIDs. Caution: It is forbidden to declare the same VBI line in several VBI component TSs. The VBI data transport syntax is compliant with the DVB standard set out in the reference document ETS 300472 "Specification for conveying ITU-R System B Teletext in Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) bitstreams" extended by the TM1952 proposal (October 21, 1997) and a proprietary protocol. VBI inserter The VBI module is capable of processing ancillary data from either the SDI or the PAL input. The following diagrams describe the different ways ancillary data can or cannot be processed:

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

Diagram

1

265

VBI video

Diagram

2

video + VBI

PAL SDI

PAL SDI

Diagram

3

video + VBI

PAL SDI

Diagram

4

video VBI

Diagram

5

VBI video + VBI

PAL SDI

PAL SDI

Figure 4.74: Ancillary data processing

• Diagram 1 shows a VBI inserter function. VBI information from the composite video signal is conveyed in the TS bitstream as described in DVB standard. The composite video signal must be externally synchronised with the SDI video source. • Diagrams 2 and 3 illustrate a common setup. • Diagram 4 shows a configuration similar to diagram 1 but which is not supported. • Diagram 5 illustrates the fact that the DBE 4110 cannot simultaneously process VBI information coming from both video inputs. 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

266

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

The VBI processor capabilities are given in a table in Chapter 1 Specifications page 21. Caution: Data cannot be encoded simultaneously according to 50Hz and 60Hz MPEG-2 standard. Notes: 1. Each CEEFAX B, VPS, WSS can be mapped into its individual PID (max. 4 PID) or all the previous can be mapped together into the same PID. 2. The same VBI line cannot be associated with different PIDs.

, Procedure 1. Select the VBI component. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the componentspecific commands. Edit parameters... Remove component... Edit additional PMT info...

3. Choose the Edit parameters... command.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

267

A dialogue box is displayed allowing parameters relating to the VBI component to be entered.

Figure 4.75: Entry of VBI component parameters The VBI source area consists of the following fields: Source

Choice between • SDI source from SSEB or AMuSE board, • Composite source from DPSN or COMPIN board.

Format

The VBI data can be in Modulated form or in Digital form. The Modulated Information or Digital Information fields concern all the lines of the VBI component. Modulated indicates that the incoming ancillary data are in the form of analogue signals sampled at 13.5MHz (digitalised waveform VBI). This is the case when • DPSN source is selected, • COMPIN source is selected, • SDI source is selected with an SDI signal supplied by an upstream DBI 2000 AVA (Audio Video Acquisition) device if the VBI processing module operates in transparent mode.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

268

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

Digital means that the ancillary data are in 4:2:2 field blanking in 10 bit word form with DID/SDID identifiers (compliant with the SMPTE 291M specification "Ancillary data packet and space formatting") and data flows are analysed. This is the case when SDI source is selected with an SDI signal supplied by an upstream DBI 2000 AVA (Audio Video Acquisition) device if the VBI processing module operates in DID/SDID mode. This function is unavailable when the analogue video input from the DPSN or COMPIN board is selected. The Multiplex area consists of the following fields: PID

Identification of the TS packets transporting the VBI component.

Off air

This field is used to suspend transmission of the component without erasing it from the configuration.

Edit the parameters and click on OK to confirm. Note: The PCR cannot be carried by a VBI component.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

269

The second VBI page is the following:

Figure 4.76: VBI Lines

The VBI lines area consists of the following fields: Line types

Choice between B Teletext, Ceefax B (Magazine), B Subtitles only, Information VPS, WSS and Transparent Line.

Lines to be transmitted

Selection of frame blanking lines which contain the transmitted VBI data. The first box concerns blanking lines in the first field, whereas the second box concerns blanking lines in the second field. Operating procedure: first select the type (line types), then click on the lines that are to be transmitted.

4. Edit the parameters and click on OK to confirm.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

270

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

Notes concerning BARCO data: 1. When creating a VBI component for transmitting Monochrome BARCO data, the transparent lines should not contain any other VBI data, otherwise the lines will not be coded and an alarm will be raised. There are no BARCO specific VBI components and MT Transparent should be selected as the VBI line type. 2. The Stream type of the MT Transparent VBI components should be 0x92 which corresponds to a BARCO proprietary value. The Stream type of the MT Transparent VBI components (ISO or BARCO) can be selected using the Telnet application. Refer to the section VBI stream type page 398. 3. A Data broadcast id descriptor with a value of 0x0103 (enter this value as the Data broadcast id) should be added to the PMT at the VBI component level. Refer to the section: PMT descriptors page 283. 0x0103

data broadcast id Leave emptyu

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

271

4.5.4.1.4 - Editing parameters of the data component , Procedure 1. Select the private data component. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the componentspecific commands. Edit parameters... Remove component... Edit additional PMT info...

3. Choose the Edit parameters... command. A dialogue box is displayed allowing parameters relating to the private data component to be entered. This dialogue box has two panels: • The first panel defines the general parameters of the private data component. It is independent of the data-injection interface. • The second panel depends on the injection interface (Ethernet, Serial or TS). First panel: General Parameters

Figure 4.77: Entry of private data component (general parameters/Ethernet interface) 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

272

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

Figure 4.78: Entry of private data component (general parameters/TS interface)

The Source area has the following field: Source

Identification of input interface type, Ethernet, Serial Input (if N41SD56K - Data Injection through RS 232 option present) or TS Input (if N41STSIN - ASI TS Input option present).

The Multiplex format area has the following fields: Output PID

Identification of TS packets which transport the component. Note: For two distinct components, it is not tested that the outgoing PID are different. The PID are considered in the incoming stream. If the two components exists, one of the components are stopped and an alarm is raised.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

273

Contains the PCR

This field allows the program clock reference to be inserted in the TS packet headers transporting the component. The PCR cannot be carried by a serial component.

Off air

This field is used to suspend transmission of the component without erasing it from the configuration.

The Bitrate area has the following fields: Min. bitrate

Min. bitrate is not used for the serial components. For the Ethernet interface, if the min. bitrate is exceeded, an alarm is raised.

Max. bitrate

- This field is used for regulation in the case of an Ethernet source. - For the serial interface, an alarm is generated and stops the component.

The Bitrate area has the following fields (for the TS interface): Stop the component if its bitrate is upper than... Stopping instructions can be made on an incoming component associated to a local service. Raise an alarm if its bitrate is lower than An alarm is raised if the measured bitrate is lower than the instruction. If the field is empty, there will be no alarm. The Signalisation area has the following field: Stream type

47232437AK01 June 2003

Identification of data type, conforming to MPEG2 standard ISO 13818-1: “Generic Coding of Moving Pictures and Associated Audio: Systems”.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

274

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

Second panel: Parameters specific to each injection interface 1. For the serial interface

Figure 4.79: Entry of data component (Serial interface parameters)

The Parameters area has the following field: Baud rate

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 and 38400.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

275

2. For the Ethernet interface

Figure 4.80: Entry of data component (Ethernet interface parameters)

The Ethernet parameters area contains the following fields: Channel id

If the data is input via the Ethernet interface, each data flow must be referenced by a unique channel number in the encoder. This number is recalled on each input.

Protocol

The proposed protocols are TBS, VIACCESS, UDP DVB Simulcrypt and TCP DVB Simulcrypt.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

276

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

TBS protocol The injection of data via the TCP/IP sockets uses a NEXTREAM control/command proprietary protocol. For this protocol there are no specific parameters.

Figure 4.81: Ethernet interface, TBS protocol parameters

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

277

VIACCESS protocol The injection of data via the TCP/IP sockets uses VIACCESS protocol. This mode is used for the broadcast of VIACCESS EMM. For this protocol there are no specific parameters.

Figure 4.82: Ethernet interface, VIACCESS protocol parameters

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

278

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

UDP DVB Simulcrypt protocol Data is transmitted via UDP/IP according to a protocol defined by DVB.

Figure 4.83: Ethernet interface, UDP DVB Simulcrypt protocol parameters

For UDP DVB Simulcrypt, the following parameters must be defined: Service_port

Read only. This field gives the port number on which the device receives data to inject. This value can be edited from the device’s advanced parameters (Data injection page). If changed a device reboot is necessary.

Data_port

Number of the IP port on which the device is listening.

Client_id

Identification of the source device. This value must be identical to the one used on the injection side.

Data_id, Stream_id

This identification is for distinguishing different private components coming from the same injector. This value must be identical to the one used on the source side. This field is called Data id in version 2 of the standard and Stream id in its first version.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

279

TCP DVB Simulcrypt protocol

Figure 4.84: Ethernet interface, TCP DVB Simulcrypt protocol parameters

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

280

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

For the TCP DVB Simulcrypt protocol the parameters are: Service port

Read only. This field gives the port number on which the device receives data to inject. This value can be edited from the device’s advanced parameters (Data injection page). If changed a device reboot is necessary.

Client id

Identifier set on the DVB injector. In the case of an EMM channel, this identifier must take the SuperCAS_id parameter value supplied by the CAS (for SuperCAS_id definitions, see the standard ETSI TS 103 197 DVB: Head-end implementation of DVB SimulCrypt). Default value: 0

Data id, Stream_id

This field is called Data id in version 2 of the standard and Stream id in its first version. Default value: 0

3. For the TS interface

Figure 4.85: Entry of data component (TS input interface parameters)

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

281

The Component selection area is used for setting the injection parameters TS input and Input PID. Note: The incident PID is replaced by the one supplied by the Operating Station (see Figure 4.77 page 271).

The Incoming signalling area is used for programming the behaviour of the encoder with regard to incoming signalling. • If Dropped is selected, this means that the streamtype information and the descriptors contained in the PMT and the SDT input tables of the incoming TS stream are not kept. The Stream_type value of the first tab ("General") is taken into account and the Edit additional PMT info... and Edit additional SDT info... commands are used for adding new descriptors. • If Added to the local signalling is selected, this means that the stream-type information and the descriptors contained in the PMT and the SDT input tables are kept and added to the descriptors edited locally. The Stream_type value of the first tab ("General") is not used. Note: If a transiting service component is linked to a generated service via the "local" option for descriptor insertion, the list of descriptors mentioned will be associated with the component in both PMTs generated by the multiplexer (the descriptors associated with the component in the PMT of the original service are forgotten). In other words, the multiplexer only generates one context per component, and the transiting component is assigned the modifications made when it is used as a linked component.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

282

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

The components thus redefined are displayed in the main window:

Figure 4.86: Main window

Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes).

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

283

4.5.4.1.5 - PMT descriptors The command for editing PMT (Programme Map Table) descriptors is used to associate descriptors with services or components. Descriptors must be added in compliance with the DVB standard set out in the reference document ETS 300 468 “Specification for Service Information (SI) in Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) systems”. • PMT descriptors for a service

, Procedure for editing PMT descriptors 1. Select the relevant service. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the service-specific commands. Edit parameters... Remove service... Edit additional PMT info... Edit additional SDT info... Add components...

3. Choose the Edit additional PMT info... command. Following this operation, a dialogue box will be displayed to add or remove descriptors and display or edit related parameters.

Figure 4.87: Editing PMT descriptors 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

284

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

An identifier under 128 can be entered in the descriptor adding screen to enable insertion of any DVB or ISO descriptor which does not appear in the default list. If the identifier entered does not match a supported descriptor the descriptor editing screen is displayed for hexadecimal input of the descriptor.

Figure 4.88: Adding a private descriptor

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

285

, Procedure for adding a descriptor 1. Click on Add... A dialogue box is then displayed to select the required descriptor type.

Figure 4.89: Add a descriptor The drop-down list in the Standard option offers a choice between several descriptor types: audio_stream, copyright, data_broadcast_id, data_stream_alignment, hierarchy, IBP, language, maximum_bitrate, mosaic, multiplex_buffer_utilization, private_data_indicator, private_data_specifier, registration, service_move, smoothing_buffer, STD, stream_identifier, subtitling, system_clock, target_background_grid, teletext, video_stream and video_window. Note: It is possible to enter the three characters of the ISO 639 language codes for any language that is not available in the list.

2. Select the required descriptor. 3. Click on OK. Clicking on OK updates the selected descriptor type in the original dialogue box.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

286

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

4. Fill in the parameters then click on Add in the right-hand panel.

Figure 4.90: Display of descriptor type with related parameters (example: language descriptor) 5. Click on OK. 6. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes).

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

287

Data_broadcast_id descriptor

Figure 4.91: Data_broadcast_id descriptor

Data broadcast id

47232437AK01 June 2003

This parameter identifies the data type transported by the component. Its value is between 0 and 65535 or can be selected from a list of preset values. The exhaustive list is available in the DVB ETR 162 standard. The default value is Asynchronous data stream. The preset values available are: Text

Value

Data pipe

0x0001

Asynchronous data stream

0x0002

Synchronous data stream

0x0003

Synchronised data stream

0x0004

Multi protocol encapsulation

0x0005

Data Carousel

0x0006

Object Carousel

0x0007

DVB ATM streams

0x0008

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

288

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

ID selector bytes

The definition and the value of this byte field depend on the selected data broadcast id. Default value: blank Maximum number of bytes: 253 bytes.

, Procedure for deleting a descriptor 1. Select the descriptor to be removed (the descriptor is displayed with a blue background). 2. Click on Remove. 3. Confirm your choice ("Yes") in the dialogue box displayed. 4. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes).

, Procedure for editing/displaying descriptor parameters 1. Select the descriptor to be edited/displayed (the descriptor is displayed with a blue background). 2. If required, edit the parameters in the Parameters area. 3. Click on OK. 4. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes).

• PMT descriptors for a component

, Procedure for editing PMT descriptors for a component 1. Select the relevant component. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the componentspecific commands. Edit parameters... Remove component... Edit additional PMT info...

3. Choose the Edit additional PMT info... command.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

289

Following this command, a dialogue box appears identical to that in Figure 4.87 page 283. However, the descriptors listed relate to the selected component. It is possible to add and remove descriptors and edit their parameters as described above. 4.5.4.1.6 - SDT descriptors The command for editing SDT (Service Description Table) descriptors is used to associate descriptors with services: bouquet_name, country_availability, data_broadcast, linkage, ML_service_name, mosaic, NVOD_reference, private_data_specifier, stuffing, telephone and time_shifted_service. Descriptors must be added in compliance with the DVB standard set out in the reference document ETS 300 468 "Specification for Service Information (SI) in Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) systems". The procedures are similar to those described for the PMT descriptors (see section 4.5.4.1.5 - PMT descriptors page 283).

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

290

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

4.5.4.2 - Advanced Functions 4.5.4.2.1 - Shared components A shared component is a component which is linked to two or more services in the SI/PSI tables. Actually data of a shared component are not duplicated. The elementary stream is just indicated by the signalling of different services. A typical application of shared components is a live information service. For instance this service could be a news service that displays stock exchange quotes on the TV set in real time. To be accessible from every service these data must be broadcast into each TS of the network and referenced by each service. There are three methods of implementation: Signalling

Signalling

Srv 1

Srv 2

Srv 3

PID 100

PID 101

PID 102

Srv 1

Signalling Srv 2

Srv 3

E. Stream

E. Stream PID 100

Srv 1

Srv 2

Srv 3

PID 100

PID 100

PID 100

E. Stream PID 100

PID 100

PID 101 PID 102 (b)

(a)

(c)

Figure 4.92: Principle of Shared Components In the first solution (case a), the elementary stream is duplicated for each service in the TS and is referenced as a private data component. The cost of this solution in terms of bandwidth is very high. The second way (case b) is to broadcast the elementary stream (ES) once in the TS. A private descriptor is used to reference the component. The decoder is able to interpret that descriptor and tune to the component. This solution is acceptable but not compatible with any remultiplexing operation since the component is not described in the SI/PSI signalling.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

291

The last solution (case c) is to use the share component feature. The data are broadcast once and the component is described in SI/PSI signalling. Any type of component can be shared.

, Procedure 1. Select a service. 2. Select the Add components... command. 3. Consult the list of components. 4. Check the Show shared components box to display all the proposed resources (including those already used in another service). 5. Select the components to share in the list. 6. Click on OK. Shared components are displayed like the other components in the main window. This means they can appear several times in the tree view. Notes: 1. When parameters of a shared component are changed, all the items of the list referring to the shared component are updated. This means that each parameter of a shared component is identical regardless of the service except for the PCR. This parameter can have different values according to the generated service that uses it. When a shared component is removed from a service, it is not removed from other services. Actually only the reference to this service is deleted. But when a shared component is only referenced by one service, it automatically becomes a non shared component. The remove command works exactly as it does for a non shared component. 2. A shared component can only be scrambled locally if all the transmitted instances of this component belong to the same access group. Thus, when a component belongs to two services and scrambling is only required for one of the services, then the component is transmitted in clear.

4.5.4.2.2 - Ghost components Ghost components are components broadcast by an encoder that are not referenced in SI or PSI tables. To recover a ghost component the receiver must know its PID. Since the PID is not present in SI/PSI signalling, the receiver and the transmitter must have a non standard mechanism to exchange the PID. This could be a private

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

292

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

data descriptor or a private table. Ghost components are used by some networks for testing purposes or to generate non DVB/ISO streams. Notes: 1. Ghost components cannot automatically be transmitted at the remultiplexing stage even if the multiplexer is set to pass all services. They must be explicitly indicated to get through the multiplexer. 2. Ghost components cannot carry the PCR. 3. If a component is a ghost component (non indicated in the outgoing stream), It does not be associated to a service. If a component is declared "ghost component" issued of a SRV1 service on the tributary, and the broadcast of the service SRV1 is authorised without stopping the component, the component is neither a ghost component because it describes in the PMT of the service SRV1.

To avoid confusion for users who do not need this feature, the Ghost component item is hidden by default. To show this item and gain access to the ghost component facilities, select the Manage ghost components command in the pop-up menu of the Generated Services item.

Figure 4.93: Add ghost components

, Procedure 1. Select the Manage ghost components command in the menu attached to the Generated Services item. The icon appears in the tree structure. All the ghost components will be grouped under this entity. 2. Right mouse click to display the shortcut menu associated with the

icon.

Add components...

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

293

3. Select the Add components... command. 4. Select components as for a standard service. Only free components can be selected. Ghost components cannot be shared.

Figure 4.94: Example of ghost component 4.5.4.2.3 - Inband command This command is not useful for this encoder type.

4.5.5 - TS input The encoder TS input is only visible and can only be configured using the N41STSIN option. The TS input is found under Tributaries in the {Technical Configuration} application window. The filtering functions on this input are the same as those offered on a multiplexer. They are summarised in the diagram on the next page.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

294

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

BLANK PAGE

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

295

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

Tributary selection

TRIBUTARY level

used

unused

Edit filtering Signalling type Alarm if bitrate >... Alarm if the bitrate <... Reallocation authorisation Pass/Stop all ECM

Service selection

SERVICE level

Pass/Stop all EMM all SERVICES

If (Stop all services)

Stop all

COMPONENT level

Remove

Drop a service

Authorise a service to be transmitted

Input service_id: Change service_id: Change service_type: Change service_name: Stop if bitrate >... Alarm if the bitrate <...

Input service_id:

Input service_id:

Stop all

all COMPONENTS

Pass all EMM

If (Stop all EMM) If (Pass all EMM)

Pass all

Authorise a service to be transmitted

Edit Filtering

Stop all EMM

Pass/Stop all services

If (Pass all services) some SERVICES

EMM service selection

Drop an EMM service

EMM _PID :

Authorise an EMM service

EMM Edit filtering

Remove

Input PID: Change PID: Stop if bitrate >... Alarm if the bitrate <...

EMM SERVICES

Pass/Stop all components Pass all

some COMPONENTS

Authorize a component Input PID: Change PID: Stop if bitrate >... Alarm if the bitrate <...

Drop a component

Add a component

Input PID: STANDARD SERVICES

TS Input filtering: menu tree

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

296

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

BLANK PAGE

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

297

All types of filtering are possible: • First level filtering: first level filtering provides global action on the TS input. The Unused command stops the TS input whilst the Used command lets the TS input stream through, applying the second, third and fourth level filtering conditions defined below. • Second level filtering: global filtering conditions may be defined (Stop all or Pass all) on each of the following three entities: services, EMM data, access control data. For both the Services and EMM data entities, additional filters can be used to authorise or drop individual services and EMM flows: Authorise a service to be transmitted or Drop a service and Authorise an EMM service or Drop an EMM service commands. Other facilities are also offered, e.g. • checking incident TS stream identity (not implemented), • selecting incident table processing mode, • authorising automatic reallocation of component PIDs in the event of conflict, • monitoring the TS input bitrate. Monitoring allows the TS input to be stopped if bitrate is exceeded with notification to the operator. • Third level filtering: the identification parameters for authorised services (service_id, service_type, service_name) and authorised EMM flows (EMM_PID) can be redefined. In addition, service components are filtered at this level; filtering may be global (Stop all or Pass all), or specific (Add a component or Drop a component). Other facilities are also proposed, e.g. • suspending or starting up transmission of a transit service, • attaching locally generated components to a transit service, • monitoring bitrates for incoming services. Monitoring allows incident services to be stopped if bitrate is exceeded with notification to the operator. • Fourth level filtering: all functions affecting components are grouped at this level, i.e.: • redefining a component PID. • suspending or starting up transmission of a transit component, • monitoring bitrates for incoming components. Monitoring allows incident components to be stopped if bitrate is exceeded with notification to the operator.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

298

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

4.5.5.1 - First level filtering: stopping/passing the TS input , Procedure to stop or pass the input TS 1. In the main window, select the tributary (TS); 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the tributary-specific commands: Unused TS input Used TS input Edit filtering conditions... Authorise a service to be transmitted... (Drop a service...) Authorise an EMM service... (Drop an EMM service...)

3. Choose the Used command (or Unused as the case may be). Note: with the Used command, the data contained in the input TS is found in the outgoing multiplex, subject to the second, third and fourth level filtering conditions defined below.

4. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes).

4.5.5.2 - Second level filtering: filtering conditions on the tributary, selecting services and EMM flows 4.5.5.2.1 - General filtering conditions on the tributary The commands linked to tributary filtering conditions are only available if the TS input is not stopped (the Used command must be ticked in the shortcut menu attached to the tributary). , Procedure for editing the general filtering conditions on the tributary 1. In the main window, select the tributary;

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

299

2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the tributary-specific commands: Unused TS input Used TS input Edit filtering conditions... Authorise a service to be transmitted... Drop a service... (Authorise an EMM service...) Drop an EMM service...

3. Choose the Edit filtering conditions... command. A dialogue box appears to input filtering conditions:

Figure 4.95: Editing of general filtering conditions for the tributary Description of fields: In the Transport stream checks area Expected original network id and Expected TS id Identity of the expected flow. If the input flow does not match the expected identity, 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

300

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

the encoder stops transmission. Each TS is identified by a specific TS_id in the original network which is in turn identified by an original_network_id. Not currently implemented. Signalling Type

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

The encoder load can be reduced by requesting that only part of the incoming signalling is managed. There are five modes available: No signalling: all signalling arriving on the input is ignored. When this mode is enabled, all filtering instructions are ignored as there is no analysis of signalling. Consequently, the filters placed on this input are not implemented. Data received on this input can only be used to define TS components. Default: the mode selected is the same as that set for output (see editing of encoder advanced parameters). ISO signalling: Only ISO tables are analysed. DVB tables are ignored (SDT and EIT). If the multiplexer is configured to generate a DVB output signal, the current SDT is generated by default by the encoder by automatic creation of service and service provider names. DVB restricted: ISO and DVB tables are analysed except for EIT p/f and EIT s tables which are still filtered. The current SDT table is produced from the data elements available in the current incoming SDT. DVB signalling: ISO and DVB tables are analysed. The SDT and EIT tables for each service are retransmitted if the filtering instructions authorise transmission of the service.

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

301

In the Default filtering modes area Services

Pass all: All incident TS services are transmitted. However, unwanted services can be removed one by one from the outgoing multiplex using the Drop a service... command in the shortcut menu attached to the tributary (see section 4.5.5.2.2 - Selection of services page 303). Stop all: All incident TS services are stopped. However, required services can be added one by one to the outgoing multiplex using the Authorise a service to be transmitted... command in the shortcut menu attached to the tributary (see section 4.5.5.2.2 - Selection of services page 303).

EMMs

Pass all: All EMM flows from the incident TS are transmitted. However, unwanted EMM flows can be removed one by one from the outgoing multiplex using the Drop an EMM service... command in the shortcut menu attached to the tributary (see section 4.5.5.2.3 - Selection of EMM flows page 306). Stop all: All incident TS EMM flows are stopped. However, required EMM flows can be added one by one to the outgoing multiplex using the Authorise an EMM service... command in the shortcut menu attached to the tributary (see section 4.5.5.2.3 - Selection of EMM flows page 306).

ECMs

Filtering is applied to all data linked to access control on the relevant TS input, i.e.: • PIDs containing ECM channels; • CA_descriptors placed in the service PMTs. Pass all: all data linked to access control is transmitted. Stop all: all data linked to access control is stopped.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

302

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

If the signal is scrambled, only the ECMs and their references in the signalling are removed.

In the Case of PID conflict area PID reallocation authorised

If a transit component PID comes into conflict with a locally generated service PID, the encoder reallocates another available PID value.

PID reallocation not authorised

If a transit component PID comes into conflict with a locally generated service PID, the encoder stops the component and raises an alarm to the operating terminal.

Notes: 1. Generated components have priority over transiting components. So, when generating a component whose PID enters into conflict with that of a transiting component, the latter is stopped (if reallocation is barred on the tributary) or its PID is reallocated. A transiting component linked to a locally generated service is not considered as a generated component. 2. It is advisable not to change the authorised/not authorised reallocation mode during normal operation and to always keep the same mode. In PID reallocation authorised mode, the way in which PIDs are reallocated is directly linked to the order in which they are detected in the incoming stream. It is therefore not surprising that reallocation can differ between a redundant device and its back up device. 3. The device accepts both services with a PCR carried by a specific PID and reallocation of the supported PID as required; however, one case of reallocation has not been solved. take the following example: S1 (Vid = 200, Aud = 201, PCR = 400), S2 (Vid = 300, Aud = 301, PCR = 400), S3 (Vid = 400, Aud = 401, PCR = 400). If no specific reallocation instruction is given, the output signal will be correct. But if video 400 to video 500 reallocation is required, the output signal will be as follows: S1 (Vid = 200, Aud = 201, PCR = 400), S2 (Vid = 300, Aud = 301, PCR = 400), S3 (Vid = 500, Aud = 401, PCR = 500). In fact the result depends on the arrival and processing order of the PMTs. The problem does not arise if the PCR is not carried by a component.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

303

In the Bitrate monitoring area Drop this input if bitrate exceeds

Maximum authorised bitrate threshold. If exceeded, the input is dropped.

and raise an alarm if bitrate is lower than: An alarm is raised if the bitrate is under the specified value.

4. Enter the various parameters in the dialogue box. 5. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes).

4.5.5.2.2 - Selection of services Selection of transit services depends on the tributary filtering conditions defined in the previous section. If the (Default filtering modes) Services Pass all radio button is enabled, all input TS services are found in the outgoing multiplex. However, unwanted services can be removed one by one.

, Procedure for removing services belonging to the input TS from the end multiplex 1. In the main window, select the tributary; 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the tributary-specific commands: Unused TS input Used TS input Edit filtering conditions... Authorise a service to be transmitted... Drop a service... Authorise an EMM service... (Drop an EMM service...)

3. Choose the Drop a service... command. A dialogue box is displayed allowing selection of the service to be removed.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

304

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

Figure 4.96: Selection of the service to be removed 4. Click on OK to confirm the selection made in the dialogue box. 5. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes).

Figure 4.97: Main window - Removing a service

Conversely, if the (Default filtering modes) Services Stop all radio button is enabled, no input TS service is found in the outgoing multiplex. However, required services may be added one by one.

, Procedure for adding services belonging to the input TS to the outgoing multiplex 1. In the main window, select the tributary;

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

305

2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the tributary-specific commands: Unused TS input Used TS input Edit filtering conditions... Authorise a service to be transmitted... (Drop a service...) (Authorise an EMM service...) Drop an EMM service...

3. Choose the Authorise a service to be transmitted... command. A dialogue box is displayed allowing selection of the service to be added.

Figure 4.98: Selection of the service to be added

Note: In the Bitrate supervision area, when the case Stop the service if its bitrate upper than is selected, the complete service is not stopped. Only some components are barred until the desired value of the bitrate reached.

4. Click on OK to confirm the selection made in the dialogue box.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

306

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

5. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes).

Figure 4.99: Main window - Adding a service 4.5.5.2.3 - Selection of EMM flows As with services, selection of transit EMM flows depends on the tributary filtering conditions defined in section 4.5.5.2.1 - General filtering conditions on the tributary page 298. If the (Default filtering modes) EMMs Pass all radio button is enabled, all the input TS EMM flows are found in the outgoing multiplex. However, unwanted EMM flows can be removed one by one.

, Procedure for removing EMM flows belonging to the input TS from the outgoing multiplex 1. In the main window, select the tributary; 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the tributary-specific commands: Unused TS input Used TS input Edit filtering conditions... Authorise a service to be transmitted... (Drop a service...) (Authorise an EMM service...) Drop an EMM service... THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

307

3. Choose the Drop an EMM service... command. A dialogue box is displayed allowing selection of the EMM service to be removed.

Figure 4.100: Selection of the EMM service to be removed 4. Click on OK to confirm the selection made in the dialogue box. 5. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes).

Figure 4.101: Main window - Removing an EMM service

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

308

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

Conversely, if the (Default filtering modes) EMMs Stop all radio button is enabled, no input TS EMM flow is found in the outgoing multiplex. However, required EMM flows can be added one by one.

, Procedure for adding EMM flows belonging to the input TS to the outgoing multiplex 1. In the main window, select the tributary; 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the tributary-specific commands: Unused TS input Used TS input Edit filtering conditions... Authorise a service to be transmitted... (Drop a service...) Authorise an EMM service... (Drop an EMM service...)

3. Choose the Authorise an EMM service... command. A dialogue box is displayed allowing selection of the EMM service to be added.

Figure 4.102: Selection of the EMM service to be added 4. Click on OK to confirm the selection made in the dialogue box. 5. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes). THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

309

Figure 4.103: Main window - Adding an EMM service

4.5.5.3 - Third level filtering: filtering conditions on services 4.5.5.3.1 - General filtering conditions These conditions only apply to services added individually using the Authorise a service to be transmitted... command. They are used for: • suspending or restarting transmission of the service, • global filtering of all service components (Stop all components or Pass all components), • changing service identification parameters (useful when forming a new multiplex or when there is a service conflict during remultiplexing), • checking that bitrate is not exceeded for the incident service, • attaching local private data to an input TS service during the remultiplexing operation.

, Procedure for editing general filtering conditions for a service 1. In the main window, select the relevant service;

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

310

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the service-specific commands: Edit filtering parameters... Remove this condition... (Authorise a component to be transmitted...) Drop a component... Add components...

3. Choose the Edit filtering parameters... command. A dialogue box appears for input of filtering conditions.

Figure 4.104: Editing of general filtering conditions for a service Description of fields: The Service selection area consists of the following fields: Input service id

Service identification,

Browse

Command displaying the list of services present in the input TS flow,

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

On air / Off air / Stopped

311

Command starting or suspending transmission of the service. When transmission is suspended (Off air selected), the Off air message appears in the application’s main window opposite the service concerned.

The Default component filtering mode area consists of the following fields: Pass all components

All service components are transmitted. However, unwanted components can be removed one by one from the outgoing multiplex using the Drop a component command in the shortcut menu attached to the service (see section 4.5.5.3.2 Individual filtering of components).

Stop all components

All service components are stopped. However, required components can be added one by one to the outgoing multiplex using the Authorise a component to be transmitted command in the shortcut menu attached to the service (see section 4.5.5.3.2 - Individual filtering of components).

The Modifications in output TS area consists of the following fields: Change service id

Number of the service in the outgoing multiplex,

Change service type

Type of service in the outgoing multiplex.

Change service name

Name of the service in the outgoing multiplex.

The Bitrate supervision area consists of the following fields: Stop the service if its bitrate higher than Maximum authorised bitrate threshold. When this is exceeded, the service is stopped. 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

312

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

and raise an alarm if bitrate is lower than: An alarm is raised if the bitrate is under the specified value.

4. Enter the various parameters in the dialogue box. 5. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes).

4.5.5.3.2 - Individual filtering of components Selection of transit services depends on the service filtering conditions defined in the previous section. If the (Default component filtering mode) Pass all components radio button is enabled, all components of the service concerned are found in the outgoing multiplex. However, unwanted components can be removed one by one. , Procedure for removing components belonging to an input TS service from the outgoing multiplex 1. In the main window, select the relevant service; 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the service-specific commands: Edit filtering parameters... Remove this condition... (Authorise a component to be transmitted...) Drop a component... Add components...

3. Choose the Drop a component... command. A dialogue box is displayed allowing selection of the component to be removed.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

313

Figure 4.105: Selection of the component to be removed 4. Click on OK to confirm the selection made in the dialogue box. 5. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes).

Figure 4.106: Main window - Removing a component

Conversely, if the (Default component filtering mode) Stop all components radio button is enabled, no component of the service concerned is found in the outgoing multiplex. However, required components can be added one by one. , Procedure for adding components belonging to the input TS to the outgoing multiplex 1. In the main window, select the relevant service;

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

314

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the service-specific commands: Edit filtering parameters... Remove this condition... Authorise a component to be transmitted... (Drop a component...) Add components...

3. Choose the Authorise a component to be transmitted... command. A dialogue box is displayed allowing selection of the component to be added.

Figure 4.107: Selection of the component to be added 4. Click on OK to confirm the selection made in the dialogue box. 5. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes).

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

315

Figure 4.108: Main window - Adding a component

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

316

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

4.5.5.3.3 - Attaching components It is possible to add local private data components to an input TS service during the remultiplexing operation. The following example shows how to configure the encoder for using attached components. In the example, the encoder is to transmit all the services coming from tributary 1 and add to the input TS service 500 a private data component, the PID of which is 774.

Figure 4.109: Attached components The attached components are private data that can be input by either the Ethernet link or the serial link. Note: The attached components cannot carry PCR.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

317

, Procedure 1. In the main window, select the relevant service. Note: For tributaries with the default mode Pass all components, define a positive service filter in Authorise a service to be transmitted... to specify the service.

Figure 4.110: Positive service filter "Authorise a service..."

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

318

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

Figure 4.111: "Authorise a service..." dialogue box

2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the service-specific commands: Edit filtering parameters... Remove this condition... (Authorise a component to be transmitted...) (Drop a component...) Add components...

3. Choose the Add components... command to attach the component.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

319

Figure 4.112: Add components... command A dialogue box is displayed for you to select the component to be added.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

320

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

Figure 4.113: Add components... dialogue box 4. Click on OK to confirm the selection made in the dialogue box. 5. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes).

Figure 4.114: Main window - attached component THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

321

Figure 4.115: Dialogue box, edition of parameters

Notes: 1. The device does not know how to change the PID PMT in the PMT table of the transiting service. Thus, the Contains the PCR is greyed out. 2. When a scrambled component is attached to a service (TS service or generated service), only the CA_descriptor corresponding to the component can be recovered. Component scrambling must therefore be performed at component level and not service level.

4.5.5.3.4 - Removing a service

, Procedure 1. In the main window, select the relevant service; 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the service-specific commands: Edit filtering parameters... Remove this condition... (Authorise a component to be transmitted...) (Drop a component...) Add components...

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

322

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

3. Choose the Remove this condition... command. A message appears to confirm removal of the service.

Figure 4.116: Confirmation request 4. Click on OK or Cancel. 5. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes).

4.5.5.4 - Fourth level filtering: filtering conditions on components 4.5.5.4.1 - General filtering conditions These conditions only apply to components added individually to the outgoing multiplex via the Authorise a component to be transmitted... command. They are used for: • changing component identification parameters (useful when forming a new multiplex or when there is a PID conflict during remultiplexing), • suspending or restarting component transmission, • checking that the bitrate is not exceeded for the incident component.

, Procedure for editing general filtering conditions for a component 1. In the main window, select the component; 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the componentspecific commands: Edit filtering parameters... Remove this condition...

3. Choose the Edit filtering parameters... command. THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

323

A dialogue box appears to input filtering conditions.

Figure 4.117: Editing of general filtering conditions for a component Description of fields: In the Selection area Input component PID

Identification of the component,

Browse

Command displaying the list components present in the service,

Off air

Command suspending transmission of the component. When transmission is suspended (button enabled), the Off air message appears in the application’s main window opposite the component concerned.

of

In the Multiplexing area Change PID

47232437AK01 June 2003

PID in the outgoing multiplex.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

324

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

In the Bitrate supervision area Stop the component if its bitrate is higher than Maximum authorised bitrate threshold. If this is exceeded, the component is stopped. and raise an alarm if bitrate is lower than: An alarm is raised if the bitrate is under the specified value.

4. Enter the various parameters in the dialogue box. 5. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes).

4.5.5.4.2 - Removing a component

, Procedure 1. In the main window, select the component; 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the componentspecific commands:. Edit filtering parameters Remove this condition...

3. Choose the Remove this condition... command. A message appears to confirm removal of the component.

Figure 4.118: Confirmation request 4. Click on OK or Cancel.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application

325

5. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes).

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

326

Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application

4.6 - {MONITORING & REDUNDANCY} APPLICATION

Foreword: • Before starting the {Monitoring & Redundancy} application, it is recommended to activate the {Equipment Interface} application (servex.exe), see note in section 4.3 - page 170. It is recommended to activate this application before using any other operating software applications. • To modify parameters in the application, do not forget to lock the terminal for the current application ( ). The commands are then accessible. The main window background is white. • The language used for the interface can be selected. Screens are available in French or English (see section 4.1.3 - Setting the interface language page 160).

4.6.1 - Purpose and scope of the application The {Monitoring & Redundancy} application allows supervision of the rate of services and their components and also transmits encoder alarms. Maintenance commands are also available to reboot a device, display device information (general and internal information) and upgrade its configuration. Note: The redundancy function, as suggested in the application name, does not concern the "Stand-Alone" environment.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application

327

The following sections present the screen layout and the different functions offered by the application. section 4.6.2

Screen layout

section 4.6.3

Alarm supervision

section 4.6.4

Supervision of services and data flow

section 4.6.5

Save all/Load all commands

section 4.6.6

Maintenance commands

section 4.6.7

Audible warning of alarms

4.6.2 - Screen layout

menu bar

Equipment window

tool bar

Redundancy report window

main window

Alarms window

Services and data flow window

Figure 4.119: Screen

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

328

Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application

• Menu bar Menu

Command

Comment

Quit

Quit the application.

Refresh

Reserved.

View

Alarms

Display the Alarms window.

Automatic redundancy report

Not applicable in "Stand-Alone" context.

Services and data flow

Display the Services and data flow window.

Hierarchical view

Display the Equipment window in Hierarchical view format.

Physical view

Not applicable in "Stand-Alone" context.

Lock all

Lock the operating station to enable device parameters to be edited. See section 4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking for details.

Unlock all

Unlock the operating station. See 4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking for details.

Save all...

Save all configurations including any comment to file.

Load all...

Restore a full configuration previously saved by Save all...

Options

Sound...

Enable/disable the terminal audible warning signal.

Window

Cascade Tile vertical Tile horizontal Arrange icons Close all views

Choice of window arrangement.

Help

About...

Display software version.

Operating manual...

Open on-line user manual. See 4.1.4 - On-line manuals page 162 for details.

Alarm help

Open {Alarm Help} application.

Tool

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application

329

• Tool bar Button

Comment Quit the application. Cancel the modifications and revert to the last saved configuration (i.e. the active configuration). Display the Alarms window. Display the Automatic redundancy report. Display the Services and data flow window. Display the Equipment window in Hierarchical view format. Display the Equipment window in Sites or Racks view format. Not applicable in "Stand-Alone" context. Lock the terminal for the current application. The commands are accessible. The main window background is white. Unlock the terminal for the current application. The commands are not accessible (only consultation is possible). The main window background is grey.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

330

Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application

• Main window To show information concerning alarms and service and rate supervision, the main window can display up to three separate windows at the same time: the Alarms window, the Equipment window and the Services and data flow window.

Alarms window

or

Hierarchical view Sites view

Equipment window Physical view

Racks view

Automatic redundancy report window

(not applicable in "Stand-Alone” context)

Services and data flow window

Figure 4.120: Tree structure of windows and views " Alarms window

This window is opened by clicking on the button or choosing the Alarms command in the drop-down View menu on the menu bar. It features three pages displayed by clicking on the corresponding Active, Released and Masked tabs. All the alarms sent by the encoder appear highlighted in yellow (plus one in blue).

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application

Major alarm

Encoder name

Minor alarm

331

Origin of fault

Figure 4.121: Alarms window The alarm highlighted in blue corresponds to the alarm to which the shortcut menus apply. These menus are displayed with a right mouse click. A detailed explanation of the alarm supervision function and the three Alarm pages can be found in section 4.6.3 - Alarm supervision page 334.

" Equipment window

This window shows the encoder supervised by the operating station, with three mutually exclusive views. a) Hierarchical view: This view may be accessed by clicking on the button or choosing the Hierarchical view command in the drop-down View menu on the menu bar. The icon symbolising the equipment is displayed in a different way depending on the equipment alarm status: • grey icon: correct operation (no alarm). • flashing red icon: alarm activated. • non-flashing red icon: alarm released by Operator. A menu is also associated with the device, providing the following commands: • the following maintenance commands: encoder reboot, consultation of device information (general and internal information) and configuration upgrade, 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

332

Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application

• release of alarms or cancellation of release, • lock or unlock the device (see section 4.1 - Ergonomic aspects for an explanation of this function). Note: Apart from the device information command which is always available, these commands are only visible if the station is locked ( ).

Figure 4.122: Equipment - Hierarchical devices view

b) Sites view: This view may be accessed by clicking on the button or choosing the Physical view command in the drop-down View menu on the menu bar. This view shows the various sites or rooms supervised by the Operating Station. It is only used in a "System" environment and is not proposed in "Stand-alone" mode. It is not described in this manual.

c) Racks view: This view may be accessed from the Sites view. It is only used in a "System" environment and is not proposed in "Stand-alone" mode. It is therefore not described in more detail in this manual. THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application

333

" Services and data flow window

This window may be accessed by clicking on or choosing the Services and data flow command in the drop-down View menu in the menu bar. The window consists of two sub-windows. The first sub-window displays the input services and rates on TS input. The second sub-window displays the output services and bit rates supplied by the encoder. Component bitrates are measured every second in the device. The bitrates fed back to the operating station appear fixed whereas in reality they fluctuate.

Figure 4.123: "Services and data flow" window The tree view has three levels: • at level one, the encoder (in the "Input services..." subwindow) and the Transport Stream conveying the set of services (in the "Output services..." subwindow). It shows the maximum rate allowed depending on the output frequency of the encoder and the size of the TS packets (see section 4.5.3.1.2 “Output” item page 194) as well as the current rate. • at level two, the services of the selected device with data flow information. The representation of services gives the name of the service, service identifier and service data flow. • at level three, the components of a service with data flow information. The representation of components depends on their scrambling (the icon is greyed out if the component is scrambled). Information given for components includes component type (Video, Audio, etc.), PID (in decimal and hexadecimal) and component data flow. 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

334

Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application

4.6.3 - Alarm supervision 4.6.3.1 - Alarms window The Alarms window contains three pages: • active alarms (Active tab), alarms not treated by the operator,, • released alarms (Released tab), alarms seen and treated by the operator, • masked alarms (Masked tab), alarms seen but not treated by the operator. Each tab text contains the number of alarms listed in each page in brackets. When a device is selected in the hierarchical view, all alarms related to the device in the Alarms window are coloured yellow except the first in the list which takes the selection colour. " Active page

This page displays the active alarms of all devices. An active alarm is represented by: • • • •

an icon which specifies the alarm severity level (minor, major), the alarm type identifier, the device which triggered the alarm, the textual description of the alarm.

A shortcut menu is attached to this page for the selected alarm to trigger it in released or masked status.

Figure 4.124: Active alarms page

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application

335

Description of shortcut commands associated with an active alarm Release

This command releases an alarm. The alarm is deleted from the list of active alarms and added to the list of released alarms. When the alarm falls, it is removed from the list. When it next rises, it becomes active again.

Release all active alarms

This command releases all active alarms. See the Release command.

Mask

This command masks the selected alarm for the device concerned. The alarm is no longer used when assessing the status of the device. The {Event Log} application however continues to manage the masked alarm (i.e. monitor its fall). When the command is run, the alarm is moved from the list of active alarms to the list of masked alarms.

Mask for all devices

This command masks the selected alarm for all devices. The alarm is no longer used when assessing the status of the devices. The selected alarm is identified by (AlarmId and AlarmIdExtension). The alarms concerned are all deleted from the list of active alarms and added to the list of masked alarms.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

336

Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application

" Released page

This page lists the alarms released by the Operator. A released alarm is an alarm present on a device which the Operator has seen and dealt with. As long as the alarm does not fall, it continues to be displayed on this page.

Figure 4.125: Released alarms page

Description of shortcut commands associated with a released alarm Reactivate

This command reactivates a selected released alarm. The alarm is deleted from the list of released alarms and added to the list of active alarms.

Reactivate all released alarms This command reactivates all released alarms. Mask the selected alarm

See Description of shortcut commands associated with an active alarm page 335.

Mask the selected alarm for all devices See Description of shortcut commands associated with an active alarm page 335.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application

337

" Masked page

Masked alarms are represented by: • an icon which specifies the alarm severity level (minor, major); • the alarm type identifier; • the name of the device which triggered the alarm or All devices showing that the alarm is masked for all devices which generate it; • a complete description of the alarm. A shortcut menu is attached to the page for the selected alarm.

Figure 4.126: Masked alarms page

Description of shortcut commands associated with a masked alarm Unmask

This command unmasks a selected alarm. This alarm is deleted from the list of masked alarms.

Unmask all alarms

This command unmasks all masked alarms in one command.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

338

Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application

4.6.3.2 - Equipment window The Equipment window can be used to release all alarms or reactivate all released alarms for a device in one mouse click.

, Procedure to release all alarms for the device 1. Select the device in the Equipment window (Hierarchical view). 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. (...) Maintenance commands... Release alarms Activate any released alarm Lock device (...)

3. Choose the Release alarms command. This has the following effects: • The audible warning on the operating station is silenced, • All alarm signals from the device are saved in the alarms list, • In the Equipment window, the icon representing the device in alarm condition remains red, but does not flash.

, Procedure to reactivate all alarms 1. Select the device in the Equipment window (Hierarchical view). 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. (...) Maintenance commands... Release alarms Activate any released alarm Lock device (...) THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application

339

3. Choose the Activate any released alarm command. If the device is still faulty, the alarm signals are reactivated (audible alarm reactivation and flashing icon). If the device is no longer faulty, the alarms disappear from the alarms list.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

340

Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application

4.6.4 - Supervision of services and data flow , Procedure to view the services and components at the encoder input (tributary) 1. Display the Services and data flow window. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. View input services and data flow... View output services and data flow... Monitor stuffing bitrate... Drop all same level items Collapse all same level items

Note: The Monitor stuffing bitrate..., Drop all same level items and Collapse all same level items commands are irrelevant for the DBE 4110 encoder.

3. Choose the View input services and data flow... command. A dialogue box allowing the tributary (TS) to be selected is displayed.

Figure 4.127: Selection of the tributary to monitor

4. Select the TS and click on OK. The services and components are displayed in the window (or in a second sub-window if the first sub-window is already open for the output services and components). THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application

341

Figure 4.128: Service and data flow (input only)

, Procedure to view the services and components sent from the encoder 1. Display the Services and data flow window. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. View input services and data flow... View output services and data flow... Monitor stuffing bitrate... Drop all same level items Collapse all same level items

3. Choose the View output services and data flow... command.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

342

Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application

A dialogue box will be displayed for you to select the device from which the output services are sent.

Figure 4.129: Selection of the device for displaying output services

Click on OK and the services and data flow will be displayed in the main window (or in a second sub-window if the first sub-window is already open for the services and input components).

Figure 4.130: Service and data flow (output only)

Note: The list is cut if the length is upper than seven pages.That can happen if the service name is too long or if the number of services is very important. It is true for the incoming services.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application

343

.

Figure 4.131: Service and data flow (input and output)

4.6.5 - Save all/Load all commands The Save all/load all commands allow to save a new configuration or recover a configuration. The Save all command is available in the Tool menu in the {Technical configuration} application. Please refer to the note page 187.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

344

Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application

4.6.6 - Maintenance commands The maintenance commands currently available concern device reboots, consultation of device information (general and internal information) and configuration upgrades. Notes: 1. Maintenance commands are only available if the station is locked (with button or shortcut Lock device command). 2. The following maintenance commands are reserved for use with a Channel Controller: Upgrade all nominal devices configuration..., Save in PCMCIA card, Off-line status, Maintenance status, Force configuration... and Load all configuration for MCC... They are therefore not relevant to Stand-Alone mode.

, Procedure to reboot the device 1. Select the device in the Equipment window (Hierarchical view). 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands: (...) Maintenance commands... Release alarms Activate any released alarm Lock device (...)

3. Choose the Maintenance commands... command. Information... Internal information... Reboot device Upgrade configuration... (...) (...)

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application

345

4. Choose the Reboot device command and confirm your choice in the dialogue box displayed.

, Procedure to get device information 1. Select the device in the Equipment window (Hierarchical view). 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. (...) Maintenance commands... Release alarms Activate any released alarm Lock device (...)

3. Choose the Maintenance commands... command. Information... Internal information... Reboot device Upgrade configuration... (...) (...)

4. Choose the Information... command. The dialogue box displayed contains three tabs for displaying general information about the device, information about boards and information about options in turn.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

346

Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application

Figure 4.132: Device information (1/3)

Figure 4.133: Device information 2/3

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application

347

Figure 4.134: Device information 3/3

, Procedure to get internal device information 1. Select the device in the Equipment window (Hierarchical view). 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. (...) Maintenance commands... Release alarms Activate any released alarm Lock device (...)

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

348

Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application

3. Choose the Maintenance commands... command. Information... Internal information... Reboot device Upgrade configuration... (...) (...)

4. Choose the Internal information... command. The dialogue box displayed contains information on internal use of resources such as the maximum number of sub-tables, the number of sub-tables used and the number of free sub-tables. The same information is displayed for sections, packets, ECM flows, etc.

Figure 4.135: Internal device information

, Procedure to upgrade configuration This command is used to format version 6.5 configuration files as version 7.0 files (current version). This operation is required to enable the next software upgrade (version "7.0" to "7.1") without interrupting programmes, since a version 7.1 device is capable of reading configurations edited in version 7.0 but not those edited with version 6.5 (unless the upgrade operation described above has been performed). THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application

349

1. Select the device in the Equipment window (Hierarchical view). 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. (...) Maintenance commands... Release alarms Activate any released alarm Lock device (...)

3. Choose the Maintenance commands... command. Information... Internal information... Reboot device Upgrade configuration... (...) (...)

4. Choose the Upgrade configuration... command. The following confirmation request will be displayed:

Figure 4.136: Confirmation request

5. Confirm the operation.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

350

Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application

4.6.7 - Audible warning of alarms An audible warning is given by the operating station as soon as an alarm signal is sent by the device. To deactivate the audible warning, it is necessary to: • remove the device fault, or • release the alarm on the Operating Station, or • disable the audible alarm using the Options/Sound command from the menu bar in the {Monitoring & Redundancy} application.

Figure 4.137: Sound command in the menu bar

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.7 - {Download} application

351

4.7 - {DOWNLOAD} APPLICATION

4.7.1 - Purpose and scope of the application The {Download} application is used for firmware downloading allowing on-site updating of boards. The following sections display the screen layout and the different functions available with the application. section 4.7.2

Screen layout

section 4.7.3

Procedure

section 4.7.4

Additional commands

4.7.2 - Screen layout

menu bar

main window

tool bar

Figure 4.138: Download screen

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

352

Chapter 4 4.7 - {Download} application

The functions are represented by the menu bar and the tool bar. Menu bar. Menu

Command

Comment

File

Open...

Browse package or firmware.

Exit...

Exit the application.

Start...

Download firmware on selected device.

Stop...

Stop downloading.

About

Display software version.

Download

Help

Tool bar. Button

Comment Quit the application. Browse package or firmware.

Add a device

Download firmware on selected device.

Stop downloading

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.7 - {Download} application

353

4.7.3 - Procedure The procedure to follow is described below and divided into three parts: 1. Before downloading: • Declare the device and establish a connection. • Consult the "Information" window to find out the current version of the boards. • Load the firmware to download. The files are provided on CD-ROM. • Configure the download operation for the relevant device by selecting the following tasks: downloading and/or memory bank toggling and/or device reboot. 2. Downloading: • Start downloading. 3. After downloading: • Consult the downloading report.

4.7.3.1 - Before downloading "

Declare and connect device

• First method: In the tool bar, Click on the address.

button. A dialogue box will be displayed for you to enter the IP

Figure 4.139: Add a device (1/2)

This function allows the encoder to be displayed in the main window as in Figure 4.140.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

354

Chapter 4 4.7 - {Download} application

• Second method: In the shortcut menu (first tab Devices), 1. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. New device... Reach/Refresh... Information Configure download... Start download... Stop download... Reboot... Toggle boot space... Log... Delete...

2. Choose the New device... command to add the encoder in the main window. 3. The new device is displayed in the main window, as in the following figure:

Figure 4.140: Add a device (2/2) "

Get information about the device

This function provides information about the device’s identity, the boards it contains and the installed options. 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.7 - {Download} application

355

3. Choose the Information... command. The dialogue box displayed contains three tabs for displaying general information about the device, information about boards and information about options in turn.

Figure 4.141: Information (1/3)

Figure 4.142: Information (2/3) 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

356

Chapter 4 4.7 - {Download} application

Figure 4.143: Information (3/3) "

Select the firmware

1. Click on the second tab Firmware, 2. In the tool bar, click on the

button.

3. Choose the package(s) or the firmware to download. Note: 1. A package consists of several firmware. 2. The package(s) is (are) provided on CD-ROM. 3. For SSEB and AMuSE boards, the firmware files are identified by the following extensions: SSEB board .tes and .ssb, AMuSE board: .amb and .fp1.

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.7 - {Download} application

357

The selected files are listed in the main window:

Figure 4.144: Firmware downloading " Configure download

This function is used to list the files to download and the actions to be carried out after a download: • memory bank toggling. The SSEB software is stored in a flash memory bank. SSEB has two memory banks, which allows the user to download a new software release via Ethernet while keeping the former one as a backup in case of trouble. • device reboot. Some parameter changes need a device reboot to be taken into account. Note: If the firmware is not selected, the Download Configuration window does not display any tasks or download log.

1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. 3. Choose the Configure download... command. 4. Select the firmware to download and/or toggle by clicking on the line. 5. For device rebooting, click on the box at the bottom-left of Figure 4.145 page 358.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

358

Chapter 4 4.7 - {Download} application

.

Figure 4.145: Firmware downloading (tasks)

4.7.3.2 - Downloading This function is used to start up downloading of the selected devices. 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. 5. Choose the Start download... command in the shortcut menu (or the on the toolbar or the Download/Start... command in the menu bar).

button

The following dialogue box is displayed for confirming the downloading operation.

Figure 4.146: Downloading confirmation

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.7 - {Download} application

359

Downloading progress is shown as in the figure below:

Figure 4.147: Downloading in progress

4.7.3.3 - After downloading "

Log... command

This function allows the operator to consult the downloading report for the selected device. 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. 3. Choose the Log... command.

Figure 4.148: Download log

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

360

Chapter 4 4.7 - {Download} application

4.7.4 - Additional commands "

Delete... command

This function is used to remove the encoder in the Devices window. 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. 3. Choose the Delete... command and click on OK to confirm in the dialogue box displayed.

"

Reach/Refresh... command

This function is used to establish the connection with the encoder after a reboot. This command is greyed out if the connection is established. 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. 3. Choose the Reach/Refresh... command.

"

Stop download... command

This function is used to stop encoder downloading. 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. 3. Choose the Stop download... command. or in the tool bar, click on the

"

button.

Toggle boot space... command

This function is used to toggle the active flash memory bank. 1. Select the device.

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.7 - {Download} application

361

2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. 3. Choose the Toggle boot space... command. Note: Before toggling, ensure that the content of the inactive flash memory bank is intact. This is not the case if downloading has been stopped (for any reason). The software in the inactive flash memory bank is then corrupt and should not be used.

"

Reboot... command

This function is used to reboot the encoder. 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. 3. Choose the Reboot... command.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

362

Chapter 4 4.8 - {Event Log} application

4.8 - {EVENT LOG} APPLICATION

4.8.1 - Principles of the {Event Log} application The purpose of this paragraph is to list all the functions of the {Event Log} application.

4.8.1.1 - Event " Event types The event types displayed are as follows: • • • • • • • •

rising alarm; falling alarm; reboots; device connections; device disconnections; device configuration changes (activations); service switching (to replacing) by INBAND command; service switching (to regular) by INBAND command.

" Paired events Some events can be grouped into pairs. Paired events are: • rising and falling alarm; • service switching to replacing and regular by INBAND command; • setup and release of connections with devices.

" Parameters displayed Each event is displayed with the following parameters: • • • •

a record number; an event identifier (event_id); a sub-identifier (event_extension); the name of the device which caused the event;

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.8 - {Event Log} application

363

• the text describing the event; • the date and local time of event occurrence; • the duration (this parameter is significant only for rising alarm events).

4.8.1.2 - View configuration functions These functions facilitate event viewing by displaying just some of the information according to operator-defined criteria.

" Sorting Sorting consists of changing the order in which events are displayed in the list. Two sort options are available: • sorting by record number; • sorting by date and time.

" Filtering Filtering consists of defining events to be displayed on the screen. Those displayed satisfy the following criteria: • they belong to event identifier lists; • they come from given devices; • they fall between two dates set by the Operator.

" Masking This function is used to mask the display of certain untimely events. These events are not deleted, they are simply no longer visible.

" Searching This function is used to move the cursor in the view of the current event to the event with which it is paired. If the search fails (the paired event is not present or not visible on account of the filter applied), an error message notifies the operator that the command has failed.

4.8.1.3 - Event exporting It is now possible to export the list of events to a text file. Any given event is represented over one line, each field of the event being delimited by a tabulation. 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

364

Chapter 4 4.8 - {Event Log} application

Only events visible in the application are exported and not the entire base. The resulting text file can then be used from a spreadsheet (e.g. Excel).

4.8.1.4 - Miscellaneous In the {Event Log} application a text displayed in the status bar informs the operator of event collection status.

4.8.2 - Screen layout " Title bar The title bar features the icon associated with the application as well as its name and the name of the open event log file.

" Menu bar Menu File

View

Command

Comment

Open...

Open an event log which can be the current log or a log archived during the week.

Open current...

Open the current event log.

Open previous...

Open one of the seven event logs archived during the week.

Export...

Export the open event log in text format.

Quit

Quit the application.

Refresh

Refresh the view following receipt of new events.

Select events...

Customise event display by applying masking filters to: • display certain event types only, • display certain alarms only, • display events between two dates, • display events relating to certain devices.

All events

Display all events without changing the configuration of any filter defined with the View/Select events... command.

Selected events...

Apply the filter defined with the View/Select events... command to the event view.

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.8 - {Event Log} application

Tools

Help

365

Report ...

Display a statistical report on the open event log.

Calc durations...

Calculate the duration between a rising alarm and a falling alarm or a device reboot.

About ...

Display the software version.

Operating manual

Access to on-line versions of manuals installed on the Operating Station.

" Tool bar This is a quick-access command bar featuring icons associated with the most frequently used commands. Just click on the relevant icon to access the command. Button

Comment Quit the application. This button has the same effect as the File/Quit command. Open an event log which can be the current log or a log archived during the week. This button has the same effect as the File/Open... command. Indicator showing that new events have arrived in the database. Click on this icon to refresh the display. This button has the same effect as the Refresh... command. Mask the display of certain events. This button has the same effect as the Select events... command.

" Status bar The status bar displays general information which the user may require at any time.

This bar features: • a description of the commands associated with menus; • an indicator of the selection applied to the base: All events All the events of the file are displayed; Selected events Filtering criteria have been applied and not all events are necessarily displayed. • the number of the record selected and the total number of events displayed. When 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

366

Chapter 4 4.8 - {Event Log} application

filtering criteria are applied, the total is different from the number of events contained in the file; • event collection status: No event collection

The {Equipment Interface} application has not been run, the icon flashes to signal a problem. If the icon is not visible the {Equipment Interface} application is open but event collection is not enabled.;

Collecting events…

The {Equipment Interface} application is open and set to collect events. • a simulator mode indicator: <space> Simulator mode is disabled; Simulator mode Simulator mode is enabled.

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.8 - {Event Log} application

367

" Main window (table of events)

Figure 4.149: Table of events

The main view of the application displays the table of events contained in the event log being consulted. The Operator can drag and drop column titles to change column display order. The parameters displayed for each event are: • • • • • •

the record number; an icon according to event type; two numbers (id and ext) providing unique identification for the event; the name of the relevant device; the text describing the event; the date and time of occurrence (PC’s local time);

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

368

Chapter 4 4.8 - {Event Log} application

• the duration. A shortcut menu attached to each event gives access to commands for finding the paired event (in certain conditions see Find paired events page 374 and quickly filtering the selected event (see Quickly filter an event type page 375). The command for finding a paired event is also available by double-clicking on an item in the table.

4.8.3 - Commands 4.8.3.1 - Commands for opening an event log file " Opening an archived event log file The File/Open command in the menu bar or the quick-access button replaces the log displayed in the application by the one contained in an archived file. These commands display standard dialogue box for selecting an event log file whose extension must be .db.

Figure 4.150: Opening an archived event log file

" Opening the current event log The File/Open current command in the menu bar replaces the event log displayed in the application by the current event log.

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.8 - {Event Log} application

369

If it fails to open a message informs the user accordingly and the file being viewed remains open. If file reading occurs normally the application’s title bar is updated and the events in the current file appear in the main window. This command is disabled when the open file is the current file. Note: Filtering criteria apply on file opening. Certain events may therefore not be displayed.

" Opening a file archived during the week The File/Open previous command in the menu bar gives quick access to an event log archived during the week. Backup files are attached to each day of the week: • • • • • • •

Monday: Evtlog01.db file Tuesday: Evtlog02.db file Wednesday: Evtlog03.db file Thursday: Evtlog04.db file Friday: Evtlog05.db file Saturday: Evtlog06.db file Sunday: Evtlog07.db file

If it fails to open (the file is not in the current directory for instance) a message informs the user accordingly and the file being viewed remains open.

4.8.3.2 - Command for exporting in text format The File/Export... command in the menu bar is only available if the base opened successfully. It creates a text file containing the events displayed in the main window. Important: To export the entire open event log all filtering must be cancelled beforehand. File format: <#>→→→→→<ext>→<desc>→<device_name>→ →↵

The symbols → and ↵ replace the tabulation and 'carriage return' characters which do not appear on print-outs. 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

370

Chapter 4 4.8 - {Event Log} application

<#>

Record number of the event in the log file.

UTC date and time of the event. The date format depends on the settings in the Windows control panel.

Event type: rising alarm, falling alarm, reboot, connection, disconnection, activation, service switch, service switch back, auto backup, si update.

minor, major, not applicable.

Event identifier.

<ext>

Event sub-identifier. The , <ext> pair provides unique identification for an event.

<desc>

Number containing the parameters of the event. Its meaning depends on the event. It can contain a bitrate, a PID, a service_id, etc.

<device_name>

Name of the device as displayed in the application without its type.

Descriptive text displayed in the application in English or French depending on settings.

Duration associated with the event. This field is blank when insignificant. See section Calculation of durations page 378.

Example:

Figure 4.151: Example of a text file after log exporting

When this command is run, a dialogue box requests the Operator to enter the name of the target file. The default file name is that of the open file with the extension .txt. Only the .txt extension is accepted. THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.8 - {Event Log} application

371

If the name entered by the Operator is that of an existing file, confirmation is requested before overwriting. The directory selected by the Operator is stored and displayed as the default backup directory when the command is next run. The export file format is suitable for use with a spreadsheet such as Excel.

Figure 4.152: Example of an exported file open in Excel

4.8.3.3 - Display commands " Refresh the view When the open event log is the current event log, the View/Refresh command in the menu bar or the quick-access button updates the display following the receipt of new events. If the events added to the log satisfy the display criteria they are displayed in the main window. The selection remains unchanged after a refresh. These commands are disabled when the open file is not the current file or as long as no new events have been received.

" Selecting (filtering) displayed events The View/Select events command in the menu bar and the quick-access button are only available if the base opened successfully. These commands are used to customise event display in the main view by masking certain events. The filtering criteria available enable the Operator to display just • certain event types; • certain alarms; • events between two dates; 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

372

Chapter 4 4.8 - {Event Log} application

• events relating to certain devices. The selected filtering criteria are stored when the Operator quits the application and reapply when the View/Selected events command is run (see page 374). When the command is run the following dialogue box is displayed:

Figure 4.153: Filtering criteria

This box includes four sections: • • • •

Display the events; From alarm display; From devices; For the period.

Choice of event types to display

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.8 - {Event Log} application

373

Only checkmarked events will be visible. By default, when the application is first used the All events option is selected. The types available depend on the events featured in the table, a list of events is displayed by default (see page 362). If the open file contains unknown event types, these also appear in this list as a character string comprising the word Event followed by the event identifier. It is possible to select or deselect all the items in the list using the Select all and Deselect all commands in the popup menu attached to the list. Alarm management When rising or falling alarms are selected filtering can be refined, by either masking certain alarms, or restricting the display to certain alarms. The + and – buttons opposite each list can be used to add or remove an alarm. To add an alarm to a list select the + button or run the Add command in the popup menu attached to the list and enter the alarm’s identifier and sub-identifier.

Figure 4.154: Add an alarm dialogue box

The Alarm id field must be between 1 and 191. Devices Filtering can be set to display just events relating to certain devices. The list of devices is derived from the devices featured in the table. The device names are sorted in alphabetical order. It is possible to select or deselect all the items in the list using the Select all and Deselect all commands in the popup menu attached to the list. Filtering period Each event is signed by a date and a time given by the device clock. It is possible to introduce time as a filtering parameter to display only events collected between two specific dates. 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

374

Chapter 4 4.8 - {Event Log} application

There are two possible options: Entire log:

This is the default option. The date and time are not included in the selection criteria.

Only the events occurring between: The operator specifies the dates and times concerned by the selection.

" Display all events The View/All events command in the menu bar is only available if the base opened successfully. It is used to display all the events without changing the configuration of any filter defined with the View/Select events command. When this command is run, a checkmark appears next to the command title. To delete this checkmark run the View/Selected events command (see section 4.2.8).

" Display selected events The View/Selected events command in the menu bar is only available if the base opened successfully. It is used to apply the filter defined with the View/Select events... command to the event view. When this command is run, a checkmark appears next to the command title. To delete this checkmark run the View/All events command (see previous section). " Find paired events

To facilitate event list scanning, a command in the shortcut menu attached to the main window is available to go to the event paired with the selected event (see page 362 for the list of events concerned by this command). The title of this command depends on the item type selected: • for a rising (raising) alarm the associated command is Go to the clearing alarm. • for a falling (clearing) alarm the associated command is Go to the raising alarm. • for a service switch (to replacing) the associated command is Go to the service switch back. • for a service switch back (to regular) the associated command is Go to the service switch. • for a connection the associated command is Go to the disconnection. • for a disconnection the associated command is Go to the connection. Let us consider the following example: THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.8 - {Event Log} application

375

Figure 4.155: Example of a search for a paired event (1 of 2)

Select the raising 697 event and double-click or run the Go to the clearing alarm command. If the clearing event is present the cursor automatically goes to this item.

Figure 4.156: Example of a search for a paired event (2 of 2)

In certain cases (e.g. if a filter is applied to raising alarms only) the search can fail in which case an error message is displayed:

Figure 4.157: Message indicating search failure

The title of the error message varies according to the event type sought. " Quickly filter an event type

This function is used to quickly mask a type of event without using the filtering configuration screen. Just select the relevant event in the main view and run the Mask this event command in the shortcut menu.

Figure 4.158: Quickly filtering an event type 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

376

Chapter 4 4.8 - {Event Log} application

Notes: 1. All the events of the same type as the one selected disappear from the view. This concerns all devices and not just the selected device. 2. Masking can be disabled by changing the configuration parameters available with the View/Select events... command.

" Sort display order This command is used to sort events for display either by record number or by date and time. Sorting is activated by clicking directly on the column in the main view. One click sorts in ascending order, a second click in descending order. The selection remains unchanged after sorting.

4.8.3.4 - Calculation commands " Statistics The Tools/Report command in the menu bar is only available if the base opened successfully. It produces a report from the open event log. When this command is run, a dialogue box is displayed to select the period for analysis.

Figure 4.159: Edit events report

This command displays a summary table per device for the chosen period:

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.8 - {Event Log} application

377

Figure 4.160: Example of an events report

In the table the items are sorted in ascending alphabetical order by device name. The table format is as follows: <device>

Device name

Number of alarms on the device

<major>

Number of major alarms on the device

<minor>

Number of minor alarms on the device

Number of device reboots

Number of device disconnections

Total of other events related to the device

Total of all events related to the device

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

378

Chapter 4 4.8 - {Event Log} application

" Calculation of durations

The Tools/Calc durations... command in the menu bar is used to calculate the duration between a rising alarm and a falling alarm or the next device reboot. Given the time required for the calculation, this command is only available on backup files and the Operator has to confirm command execution. Once the calculation has been performed, the duration of each event is displayed in the Duration column in the main window. Durations are stored in the event log file. It is not necessary to recalculate duration each time a file is opened. Note: When the calculation proves impossible (if the falling alarm is not saved in the same file) or duration is insignificant, the Duration column remains blank.

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.9 - {Alarm Help} application

379

4.9 - {ALARM HELP} APPLICATION

4.9.1 - Scope This application get electronic on-line help about alarms generated by supervised devices. The online help application is run like any other DBS 2930 "Stand-Alone" application or automatically via the {Monitoring & Redundancy} and {EventLog} applications. It can also be run from the command line.

4.9.2 - Features 4.9.2.1 - Extended description of alarms For each alarm or event, the {Alarm help} application provides the following extended information: • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Alarm AID (number), e.g.: 5; Alarm AID (text), e.g.: AID_ALIM; Alarm extension id (number, if passed through the command line); Alarm severity (major/minor) + icon (red for major, orange for minor); Wording of the alarm (as in the Alarms Window of the {Monitoring & Redundancy} application) (text in English or French); Category of the alarm. Matches X733 standard categories when possible (Equipment, QoS, etc.); Autobackup current capability (Selectable / Impossible) indicates if this device is allowed to trigger automatic redundancy switch-over for itself; Autobackup upstream capability (Selectable / Impossible) indicates if this device is allowed to trigger automatic redundancy switch-over for the upstream device; Probable cause (text in English or French); X733 standard probable cause (only displayed when applicable); Action to take (text in English or French); Source device(s) (text); User comments (text).

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

380

Chapter 4 4.9 - {Alarm Help} application

4.9.2.2 - Print capability A print command is used to print either the displayed alarm, all alarms or all the alarms regarding one device type. All fields are systematically printed except user comments. The user can choose whether to print them or not. Printing (and display) is carried out according to the current language selected.

4.9.2.3 - Search engine By entering an AID (and possibly AlarmIdExtension and/or AlarmIdDescription), the {Alarm help} application jumps to the alarm page identified by this AID. If several alarms have the same AID, the first of the list is displayed. It also searches for a word in general and displays all the alarms containing this word. The search result is displayed in the Summary window. Then, when selecting the alarm, the usual online help is displayed.

4.9.2.4 - Navigation tool The {Alarm help} application is used to go to the previous, next, first or last alarm in the entire list of potential alarms (not the active alarm lists displayed in the master application). Alarms are sorted by AID and then by cause.

4.9.2.5 - Synchronisation with the {Monitoring & Redundancy} and {Event Log} applications From the {Monitoring & Redundancy} and {Event Log} applications, there is a command that automatically runs the {Alarm help} application and displays the selected alarm. When the {Alarm help} application has already been run, no new instance of this application is run, its display is just updated.

4.9.2.6 - Synchronisation with other applications Other applications can use the {Alarm help} application by selecting the command line with the alarm parameters: AlarmId, AlarmIdExtension, AlarmIdDescription. See Access via any application page 383.

4.9.2.7 - User defined comments The {Alarm help} application enables the user to add comments for one alarm. These comments are saved on the disk and are still kept after a soft patch. If an THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.9 - {Alarm Help} application

381

alarm has been deleted in a new patch, the corresponding user comment entry is also deleted. A comment can be 4096 characters long and is completely modifiable (Cut/Copy/Paste) by an edit command. It can only store alphanumeric characters. They are independent of language settings.

4.9.2.8 - French/English versions The graphical user interface is available in either English or in French. It depends on language settings when the {Alarm Help} application is installed.

4.9.2.9 - Customisation of display The following fields are optional and may be shown or hidden in the {Alarm help} application window: • • • • • • • •

Wording; Autobackup current and Autobackup upstream; Action to take; User comment; Source device(s); Cause; X733 standard probable cause; Category.

4.9.2.10 - Summary of alarms The summary displays all available alarms sorted by AID. AID name and alarm wording are also displayed to recover an alarm. While selecting an alarm in this list, the {Alarm help} application is automatically updated. See User Interface (main window and commands) page 384

4.9.2.11 - Help / About A help/about command displays the {Alarm help} application version and a number identifying the table content.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

382

Chapter 4 4.9 - {Alarm Help} application

4.9.3 - Access to the {Alarm help} application 4.9.3.1 - Access via the {Monitoring &Redundancy} application The {Alarm help} application is accessible: • via the menu toolbar help command: This only runs the {Alarm help} application (no alarm is selected).

Figure 4.161: Access from {Monitoring &Redundancy}

• by selecting an alarm in the Alarms window in the {Monitoring & Redundancy} application and pressing the key. • by right-clicking on a shortcut menu attached to an alarm and selecting Display help.

Figure 4.162: Contextual Display help... command attached to an alarm

4.9.3.2 - Access via the {Event Log} application The {Alarm help} application is accessible: • via the menu toolbar help command; • by selecting an alarm in the Alarms window and pressing the key; • by right-clicking on a shortcut menu attached to an alarm or an event and selecting Display help.

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.9 - {Alarm Help} application

383

4.9.3.3 - Access via any application {Alarm help} is an independent application (.exe) and can be accessed from the command line. Parameters are optional. Here are the use cases: • AlarmHelp {Alarm help} has been run and displays the first alarm. • AlarmHelp displays the first alarm corresponding to the AlarmId. • AlarmHelp displays the first alarm corresponding to the AlarmId and AlarmIdExtension. • AlarmHelp displays the first alarm corresponding to the AlarmId, AlarmIdExtension and AlarmIdDescription. with : integer, : integer, : integer.

Figure 4.163: Access via a command line (here, first alarm corresponding to the AlarmId = 1)

If no alarm is found or if the previous format is not respected, an error message box is displayed: Alarm not found. {Alarm Help} will display the nearest one.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

384

Chapter 4 4.9 - {Alarm Help} application

4.9.4 - User Interface (main window and commands) A resizable pop-up window displays the previously selected alarm:

Figure 4.164: Alarm Help main window

In the menu bar, the database and DBS 2930 "Stand-Alone" versions are available via the Help/About database... and Help/About Alarm Help... commands in the menu bar. All other commands can be found at the top of the window. Each button corresponds to one command (Summary, First, Previous, Next, Last, Search, Print, Configure). Summary

Summary button displays the list of available alarms.

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.9 - {Alarm Help} application

385

First

{Alarm help} application displays the first alarm of the alarm list.

Previous

{Alarm help} application displays the previous alarm of the current alarm list.

Next

{Alarm help} application displays the next alarm of the current alarm list.

Last

{Alarm help} application displays the last alarm of the current alarm list.

Search...

The Search button displays a dialogue box and the user has to enter the AID or the AID and ALARM IdExtension and/or AlarmIdDescription of the alarm he or she wants to find. If the alarm is not found, an error message box is displayed and the {Alarm help} application still displays the previous alarm. It also searches for a word among the entire list of alarms and displays the search result in the summary window. The user has to select the alarm containing the word and the main window is updated. When the summary is closed, the main window displays the searched alarm.

Figure 4.165: Search dialogue box

Print

47232437AK01 June 2003

Click on the Print button to display a dialogue box and select the type of print job and whether the user comments are to be printed or not (check box). A THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

386

Chapter 4 4.9 - {Alarm Help} application

preview button displays the print preview (with QuickReport 3.0.5).

Figure 4.166: Print dialogue box

Here are the types of available print options: (Print) Displayed alarm. Here is an example of a print job for the current alarm:

Figure 4.167: Example of a print job

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.9 - {Alarm Help} application

387

(Print) Alarm regarding one device type Select All Alarms of one device in the dialogue box and then select the type of device. Here is an extract from a print job for all alarms regarding one device type (switcher):

(Print) All alarms Select All Alarms in the dialogue box. The format is the same as for the displayed alarm. Configure

47232437AK01 June 2003

The Configure button opens a list of fields that may be displayed or not. By default, all fields are displayed.

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

388

Chapter 4 4.9 - {Alarm Help} application

Figure 4.168: Configure dialogue box

If the User comments box is selected, user comments are displayed in the main window of the {Alarm Help} application and can be edited via another dialogue box accessible by clicking on the User Comment hyperlink:

Figure 4.169: Comments editor

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.9 - {Alarm Help} application

389

Comments are edited by directly typing the text in the dialogue box panel. They are saved once the user selects OK. If Cancel is selected, all modifications are deleted and the user comments panel reverts to its previous state. Delete, Copy and Paste respectively delete the selected text, copy it to clipboard and paste it from the clipboard.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

390

Chapter 4 4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application

4.10 - COMMANDS AVAILABLE WITH THE TELNET APPLICATION

This section describes how to use the Telnet application. It also explains the role of parameters available to the user. The following parameters can be edited by the user: • Audio stream type, • LTW offset, • Superencoder source switching mode, • VBI stream type, • IP Communication. • LDSChurch mode, • ABSAT mode, • Multichoice-D1 mode, • Foxtel 6dB uplift, • Closed caption type, • Extended-data insertion (line 284).

Note: editing parameters other than those described can lead to major device

malfunction.

4.10.1 - Using the Telnet application This section describes how to access the Telnet application and edit the parameters. The definition of editable parameters is given in the following section.

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application

391

1) On the PC connected to the device, run the Telnet command to open the application.

2) Select Remote System under the Connect command in the Telnet (None) window

3) In the Connect window, enter the device IP address and click on the Connect button to validate

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

392

Chapter 4 4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application

Once the connection has been established with the device, the following window is displayed:

4) Do not enter a User name and press Enter on the keyboard. The following window is displayed:

5) Enter setup after the {Runtime@SSEB}/r0: prompt 6) Do not enter a Password and press Enter on the keyboard

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application

393

7) Enter edit after the SETUP prompt

8) The window displays several choices, select 8 operating mode

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

394

Chapter 4 4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application

The first editable parameter is displayed.

The example above shows the Video bidir parameter which can be set to ON if the value 1 is entered or OFF if the value 0 is entered. The value in brackets indicates the current parameter value. If you press Enter on the keyboard without indicating a value, the current value is kept and the next parameter displayed. The next parameter is also displayed if you enter a new value. All the parameters are displayed and edited in the same way:

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application

395

9) When all the parameters have been displayed, the window again displays several choices. Select 0 Exit to display the SETUP prompt:

10) Enter quit after the SETUP prompt The Save setup ? question is displayed. Enter y. The Are you sure ? question is displayed. Enter y.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

396

Chapter 4 4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application

The Setup has been saved message is displayed to confirm that changes have been saved.

Note: the changes will be applied when the device is next booted up.

4.10.2 - IP Settings The IP Address, IP Netmask and Default gateway parameters can be edited via the Telnet application. To do this: 1) follow the instructions in section 4.10.1 - Using the Telnet application up until window 8). Select 2 : ethernet IP address

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application

397

2) the IP parameters window is displayed:

3) enter the parameter values as indicated in steps 8), 9) and 10) of the section 4.10.1 - Using the Telnet application.

Note: the changes will be applied when the device is next booted up.

4.10.3 - Parameter definitions The parameter editing procedure is described in the previous section.

4.10.3.1 - Video bidir Video bidir (ON:1 OFF:0) (x)? This parameter applies to very specific applications and should not be edited. Default value = 0.

4.10.3.2 - Audio stream type Audio stream type (MPEG1:3 MPEG2:4) (x)? This parameter defines the Audio stream type value so that it corresponds to either MPEG1 (value3) or MPEG2 (value 4). Default value = 3. All Audio components generated by the encoder will have the same audio stream type and no combination is possible.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

398

Chapter 4 4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application

4.10.3.3 - LTW_offset Set LTW_offset flag when service PCR (Yes:1 No:2) (x)? This parameter tells the encoder whether or not it should add the LTW offset value to the video when the video is carrying the PCR. Default value = 1.

4.10.3.4 - SPE (SuperEncoder) switch source mode SPE switch source mode (same as old board:1 same as new board:2) (x)? This parameter is used to choose the SuperEncoder board switch mode: • if you have an old version of the board (version AG), mode 1 must be selected • if you have a recent version of the board (versions AH, AJ or AK), mode 2 must be selected. However, if the video input signals are not synchronous then interference caused by the switch appears on the picture. In this case mode 1 can be used to reduce interference.

4.10.3.5 - VBI stream type VBI stream_type with MT lines (ISO:1 BARCO:2) (x)? This parameter is used to choose the stream type value used for Monochrome transparent VBI components. The (ISO) default value is the 0x06 standardised value. The other possible (BARCO) value is 0x92 which corresponds to a BARCO proprietary value used for Monochrome transparent lines. All Monochrome transparent lines generated by the encoder have either a 0x06 or 0x92 stream type value and no combination is possible. A descriptor must be added to the PMT. See {Technical Configuration} application section Editing parameters of the VBI component page 264.

4.10.3.6 - LDSChurch mode LDSChurch mode -ignored when SPE board is declared- (ON:1 OFF:2) (x) ? This mode only concerns operation in 60Hz mode. When the mode is set to ON, the active lines in fields 1 and 2 are moved up a line. The first active line is therefore line 21 for field 1 and line 284 for field 2 (the first line being line 1). This mode is used to transmit the sub-titles as a useful part of the video signal. THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application

399

On a DBE 4130 or 4150 Encoder featuring a SuperEncoder board, this parameter is not acknowledged and the lines are not moved up. The SuperEncoder board is detected when the device is turned on. Checking the "closed caption" box in the DBS 2930 Operating station, video component parameters VBI tab is unnecessary. If the box is checked, the sub-titles will be transmitted in the video stream twice (as user data and in line 21). Default value = 2

4.10.3.7 - ABSAT mode ABSat mode (ON:1 OFF:2) (x) ? This mode, designed for the DBE 4130 Encoder, is used to modify Video encoding so that it is compatible with Philips "G+2" series decoders. When ABsat mode has been selected: - the VBV delay value is calculated and sent for each picture, - the default quantisation matrix is systematically included for each I-picture. The DBE 4130 Encoder in ABSat mode remains DVB compliant. Notes: - operation in ABSat mode is not guaranteed with decoders other than Philips "G+2" series decoders. - ABsat mode has been designed for the DBE 4130 Encoder. Operation in ABsat mode is not guaranteed for other DBE 41XX Encoders. - ABsat mode only operates in 50Hz mode. - the Helper Channel application, which is a specific function of the DBE 4120 Encoder, does not operate in ABsat mode. Default value = 2

4.10.3.8 - Multichoice-D1 mode Multichoice-D1 mode (ON:1 OFF:2) (x) ? This mode implements an MPEG-2 syntax specifically for the video component. - Each PES contains a single GOP, - The PES is formatted as follows:

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

400

Chapter 4 4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application

- the DataAlignmentIndicator bit is set to 1 (PES payload begins on a video "Elementary Stream" header), - the PES data length field uses 10 bytes instead of 11 for I and P-pictures (a 0xFF stuffing byte has been deleted). - There is no stuffing byte between pictures at "Elementary Stream" level (no 16-bit alignment), - There is no stuffing "Elementary Stream" (minimum payload at TS level). When the mode is set to OFF, each PES contains a picture, the DataAlignmentIndicator is set to 0, the PES data length field uses 11 bytes, there is a number of stuffing "Elementary Streams" (required to align the start of the PES with the start of the TS packet) and there is no longer 16-bit alignment. Default value = 2.

4.10.3.9 - Foxtel 6dB uplift Foxtel 6dB uplift (ON:1 OFF:2) (x) ? This mode adds +6dB of gain to audio samples encoded in MPEG-1 by the SSEB board. The audio is doubled before peak limiting and encoding. All SSEB board audio inputs are concerned: - SDI, - Analogue audio converted to digital. All audio components encoded by the SSEB board are affected. AES/EBU audio signals generated by the ATADI board are affected. The 2.1kHz test signal, 0dB generated by the SSEB board is not affected. Audio signals generated by the AMUSE board are not affected. The uncompressed audio mode (DBE 4120) is not affected. Note: you are advised not to use Foxtel mode and a 384Kbit/s bitrate at the same time, as in this case audio quality is not guaranteed. Default value = 2

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 4 4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application

401

4.10.3.10 - Closed Caption type Closed Caption type -only with DBE4130- (DVB/ATSC:1 DVB/DSS:2) (x) ? In 60Hz mode, the DBE 41XX can extract line 21 sub-title information (the first line being line 1) from the video input signal (if the information is modulated and not binary) and can insert it into the "Video Elementary stream" according to the ATSC A/53 standard. This is done when the "Closed caption" box is checked in the Technical Configuration application, video component advanced parameters, VBI tab. With a DBE 4130 Encoder, the sub-titles can be inserted into the "Video Elementary stream" according to two standards: DVB/ATSC: 1 = "DVB / ATSC A/53" standard, DVB/DSS: 2 = "DTV95MDB-04, DirectTV MPEG1 and MPEG2 video stream specifications for IRDs, version 2.1" standard. This parameter does not affect the MPEG-2 TS layer or the PSI and SI tables. This function is only implemented on DBE 4130 Encoders. On other DBE 41XX Encoders, the parameter value is set to 1. Default value = 1 (DVB/ATSC A/53)

4.10.3.11 - Extended-data insertion (line 284) Extended-data insertion (line 284) -only with DBE4130- (ON:1 OFF:2) (x) ? Line 21 of the second field (i.e. line 284) can contain information similar to sub-title information known as "extended data services". This parameter can have two values: 2 = OFF 1 = ON, the "extended data services" data is extracted from the video input signal (only in modulated form) and inserted into the "Video Elementary stream" syntax in the same way as the sub-titles. This function is only implemented on DBE 4130 Encoders operating in 60Hz mode. On other DBE 41XX Encoders, the parameter value is set to 2 (OFF). Default value = 2 Notes concerning Closed Caption type and Extended-data insertion (line 284) parameters: 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

402

Chapter 4 4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application

- A minor alarm will be raised if the Extended-data insertion (line 284) parameter is set to 1 and no data is present in the input signal. - The video component syntax defines "a data type identifier" which has the value 0x09 for sub-titles and 0x0A for "extended data services" data. - If the DBE 4130 Encoder must be switched to 50Hz mode, the Extended-data insertion (line 284) parameter must be set to 2 (OFF) before the Encoder is switched from 60Hz to 50Hz mode. The follow table gives permitted combinations for the Closed Caption and Extended Data parameters:

Operating station

Encoder configuration

Result

Closed Caption ON/OFF

Closed Caption ATSC/DSS

Extended Data ON/OFF

0

0

0

No Closed Caption and no Extended Data

0

0

1

Do not use

0

1

0

No Closed Caption and no Extended Data

0

1

1

DSS Extended Data

0

0

0

ATSC Closed Caption

1

0

1

Do not use

1

1

0

DSS Closed Caption

1

1

1

DSS Closed Caption and DSS Extended Data

Except for the restrictions given in the table above, any combination of the five ABSat, LDS, Multichoice, Closed Caption, Extended Data parameters is permitted.

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 5 - PC operation - Fast_DSNG software

403

Chapter 5 PC operation - Fast_DSNG software 5.1 - Fast-DSNG .......................................................................................... 405 5.2 - Software presentation........................................................................ 407 5.3 - Interfaces ............................................................................................ 5.3.1 - Encoder interface.......................................................................... 5.3.2 - Modulator/up-converter interface.................................................. 5.3.3 - Graphic interface ..........................................................................

410 410 410 410

5.4 - Functions ............................................................................................ 5.4.1 - Modulator configuration ................................................................ 5.4.2 - Encoder configuration................................................................... 5.4.3 - Supervision ...................................................................................

411 411 411 411

5.5 - Operation ............................................................................................ 5.5.1 - General principles......................................................................... 5.5.2 - Setup panel................................................................................... 5.5.3 - Transmission panel.......................................................................

413 413 414 416

5.5.3.1 - Transmission parameters ............................................................ 417 5.5.3.2 - Parameters linked to encoder control and signal content ............ 419

5.5.4 - Alarms panel................................................................................. 5.5.5 - Scrambling panel .......................................................................... 5.5.6 - Information panel .......................................................................... 5.5.7 - Preset panel.................................................................................. 5.5.8 - Dynamic behaviour .......................................................................

426 427 429 430 432

5.5.8.1 - No connection .............................................................................. 432 5.5.8.2 - Setting up a connection ............................................................... 432

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

404

Chapter 5

BLANK PAGE

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 5 5.1 - Fast-DSNG

405

5.1 - FAST-DSNG

A DSNG system is used to transmit pictures and sound between the site of an event and a professional television (producer, television channel, etc.). The signals are produced at the site of the event from a mobile system containing the equipment required to produce video and audio signals and transmit them to a site for broadcast via a satellite link. The size of the DSNG system can vary considerably, depending on the coverage desired for the event and the mobility required. A DSNG system can just as easily be a camera, encoder, satellite modulator/up-converter which can fit into one or two flight cases, as several O.B. vans containing cameras, mixing desks, encoders, cables, etc. Those involved in DSNG systems are: - satellite operators; - satellite antenna manufacturers; - satellite modem manufacturers; - manufacturers of power amplifiers and RF systems; - video encoder/decoder manufacturers; - audio encoder/decoder manufacturers; - supervision system manufacturers; - systems integrators. "

"

Setting up DSNG communications

Setting up a satellite link requires that a procedure defined by the satellite operator be followed: 1. The satellite operator notifies the DSNG operator of the: - position of the satellite; - transmission power; - uplink frequency; - bandwidth; - downlink frequency after frequency translation by the satellite. 2. The DSNG operator contacts the reception station by telephone and begins a connection procedure. 3. This operator directs the satellite antenna and transmits a low power, pure carrier on the uplink frequency. When communication occurs on frequency C-band, spectral inversion may be required. 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

406

Chapter 5 5.1 - Fast-DSNG

4. The reception station confirms reception of the signal. 5. From this moment onwards, the DSNG operator can no longer interrupt the signal transmitted to the satellite because signal absence may be interpreted by automatic frequency allocation systems as availability of the frequency and bandwidth. 6. The DSNG operator increases the power and sets the modulator to modulation mode. 7. If the operator has a decoder and his geographical position enables him to receive the transmitted signal, he checks that the transmission is being sent correctly. In the event of a problem, he may also check the signal at the modulator output by using the L-BAND output.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 5 5.2 - Software presentation

407

5.2 - SOFTWARE PRESENTATION

"

Purpose

This software is supplied as standard with DBE 4110 encoders. The main purpose of this software is to facilitate input of the parameters required for setting up a satellite link on the encoders and the modulator. Configuration using the graphic interface is very simple. The operator can display all the transmission parameters together with the composition of the transmitted signal on six screens. Configuration changes are optimised by reducing operator actions. The software operates on a PC (laptop) with standard performance, featuring: - Windows 95, 98 or NT operating system; - Ethernet 10BaseT interface; - 640x800 colour screen with 256 colours; - pointer device (mouse or other). The application is only available in English.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

408

Chapter 5 5.2 - Software presentation

"

Environment

Three configurations are supported in the software.

satellite dish HPA (poser amplifier) RF upconverter FI Modulator

LBand

Decoder

ASI Pilot encoder ASI Second encoder

Configuration 1: one encoder only Configuration 2: one encoder and one modulator. The modulator is controlled by the encoder (called the main encoder) which must feature the N41SMODC option (NEWTEC modulator control) or the ISMB board. Configuration 3: two encoders and one modulator. The modulator is controlled by one of the encoders (called the main encoder) which must feature the N41SMODC option (NEWTEC modulator control) or the ISMB board. The output of the second encoder is connected to the ASI input of the main encoder. The main encoder must feature the N41STSIN option (ASI TS input processing).

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 5 5.2 - Software presentation

409

The other devices that can be used in a DSNG system (redundant encoders, decoders, power amplifiers, up-converter) are not controlled by this software, apart from the up-converter when it is incorporated into the modulator.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

410

Chapter 5 5.3 - Interfaces

5.3 - INTERFACES

5.3.1 - Encoder interface The encoders are controlled/monitored by an Ethernet 10BaseT interface in TCP/IP using the NEXTREAM protocol. Configuration 3 (with two encoders) requires a hub to allow the two encoders to be controlled from the same PC.

5.3.2 - Modulator/up-converter interface The modulator/up-converter is controlled/monitored via the main encoder which must feature the N41SMODC option (Ext. Modulator C&C) or the ISMB board.

5.3.3 - Graphic interface The graphic interface is a standard Windows interface.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 5 5.4 - Functions

411

5.4 - FUNCTIONS

Fast_DSNG software is used to display and modify part of the configuration of the modulator and encoders.

5.4.1 - Modulator configuration The parameters which can be modified are: - output mode (off, pure carrier, on); - attenuation of the output signal; - symbol rate or bandwidth; - RF frequency; - convolution and FEC; - activation of spectral inversion.

5.4.2 - Encoder configuration The main parameters that can be modified are: - list of components inserted into the signal; - enabling/disabling of scrambling for all the components; - session word used for scrambling and parity; - bit rate of each component (the bit rate can be calculated automatically for video components). The DVB signalling information associated with the service and network is automatically set by the software.

5.4.3 - Supervision The available supervision functions are: - display of the active alarms list of the encoders; - level of each alarm; 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

412

Chapter 5 5.4 - Functions

- display of the serial numbers of the encoders; - display of the software and hardware options installed on each encoder.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 5 5.5 - Operation

413

5.5 - OPERATION

5.5.1 - General principles The graphic interface of the DSNG application is a 6-panel dialogue box: - Transmission; - Alarms; - Scrambling; - Information; - Preset; - Setup. You move from one panel to another by clicking the tabs of the relevant panels or pressing the function keys F1, F2, F3, F4, F5 or F8 for panels 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6. All parameters can be edited with the mouse. Just click on the small calculator image to the right of each parameter editing field:

Figure 5.1: Numeric keypad 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

414

Chapter 5 5.5 - Operation

5.5.2 - Setup panel This panel is mainly used on initial application start-up. It allows the software to be configured to indicate: - whether Control/Command communication of the equipment is enabled or disabled; - the system configuration (1, 2 or 3); - the parameters required for setting up the Control/Command links of the encoders, i.e. their IP address. The parameters are saved to the hard disk and are read automatically each time the software is started up. They are saved in a file of the Windows initialisation file (.ini) type.

Figure 5.2: Setup panel

The choice of configuration and IP addresses of the encoders is only possible when communication with the devices is stopped. To do this, press the button in the bottom left hand of the window. Follow the instructions in the box on the right-hand side of the panel: • Enter the IP address of the first encoder, THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 5 5.5 - Operation

415

• Select other devices, modulator or a second encoder: - Check Controls a modulator box (if a modulator is present), - Check Uses an external signal in TS input box, to enable the TS input (the option is present in the first encoder) to be connected to an external device not controlled by the {Fast_DSNG} application, - Check Use and Control a second encoder box, to allow the control of a second encoder. The TS input option must be present in the second encoder (check Use an external signal in TS input box), enter its IP address, - Enter the name of the service in the Station name put in window, 6 characters plus -1 (or -2).

Caution! The encoder(s) and the PC must have different IP addresses. If two devices have the same IP address, software behaviour may be unpredictable.

When the information has been entered, press Connect to DSNG system to start up Control/Command communication with devices. When communication is enabled, the software attempts to set up communication with the encoder(s) in order to gather the configuration information displayed to the user in the other panels.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

416

Chapter 5 5.5 - Operation

5.5.3 - Transmission panel The Transmission panel is the most frequently used panel. It is displayed by default on starting up the application if the parameters required for starting communications were found in the initialisation file.

Figure 5.3: Transmission panel

It is divided vertically into two areas: - transmission parameters are displayed on the left; - parameters linked to encoder control and signal content are displayed on the right. Note: If a modulator is used, the Transmission page can be used to change the L-Band Frequency parameter.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 5 5.5 - Operation

417

5.5.3.1 - Transmission parameters Transmission parameters are found in two areas. The upper area is used during the procedure for setting up satellite communication. The lower area is used for configuring the modulator. In the upper part, four buttons control the modulator output: • In Off position (key F9), the modulator does not transmit a signal. The operator can then set the modulation parameters (frequency, bandwidth, etc.) in the lower area. The application does not send any configuration to encoder. • In Ready position (key F10), the modulator does not transmit, the parameters can no longer be edited. The software sends the configuration to the encoders. • In any Pure carrier position (key F11), the modulator transmits a pure carrier with the level displayed under the button. The parameters entered in the lower area can no longer be edited. • In Modulation position (key F12), the modulator transmits a modulated signal with the level set to High. In this mode, level and modulation parameters can no longer be edited. Note: If the system is disconnected, all the devices remain in the initial state. The parameters displayed in the lower area can only be modified in the Off position (key F9). Access is unauthorised in the other positions and the cursor indicates this by changing its form ( ). The Symbol rate and Bandwidth parameters are interlinked by a formula that involves the Convolution parameter. Each time the operator changes one of these three, the Bandwidth and/or Symbol rate parameters are recalculated immediately. Thus, if the operator enters the symbol rate, the application will immediately calculate the bandwidth for information purposes, or vice versa. The calculated value will be displayed in the process. Note: If a bad format is chosen, the bandwidth cannot be calculated and the field remains blank. An error message is displayed.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

418

Chapter 5 5.5 - Operation

The following formula is applied: Bandwidth = Symbol rate * (1 + Roll off) where Roll off = 0.35 in QPSK convolution Roll off = 0.26 in 8PSK or 16 QAM convolution

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 5 5.5 - Operation

419

5.5.3.2 - Parameters linked to encoder control and signal content In Figure 5.3, the right-hand area of the dialogue box is dedicated to encoder control and the content of the transmitted signal. The button in the Components area title is used to quickly modify the service-id parameter.

Figure 5.4: Service Id Editor

It displays two lists of available components (one list per encoder). The content of the list depends on the software and hardware options installed on each encoder. Above each list, an alarm symbol appears in front of each encoder name. Its appearance depends on alarm status: • Green: no alarm, • Orange or red flashing: alarms have occurred. In the list, a check box in front of each item allows a component to be inserted into the signal transmitted to the satellite. By clicking these boxes, the components are inserted into, or removed from, the signal one by one. If the Video bitrate automatic adjustment in the Transmission panel is checked, each time a component is inserted into or removed from the signal, the application recalculates the bit rate of the video components automatically to ensure optimum use of the bandwidth. For systems with two encoders, the rate allocated to each video component is always identical. For advanced use, a button located under each list allows access to parameters of the component selected in the list. This screen can be used to modify the PID, profile or other advanced parameters. The presentation of the parameters in these screens is identical to that of the DBS 2930. To change video parameters, the procedure is: 1. Select the component, 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

420

Chapter 5 5.5 - Operation

2. Click on the Edit Video parameters... button or double-click on the component, 3. The screen for the parameters of a video component (General panel) appears:

Figure 5.5: Video parameters (general panel)

The video rate cannot be set by the user if it is calculated automatically for each change of transmitted components.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 5 5.5 - Operation

421

4. Click on the Advanced tab to edit the advanced parameters of a video component (Advanced panel):

Figure 5.6: Video parameters (advanced panel)

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

422

Chapter 5 5.5 - Operation

5. Click on the VBI tab to edit the VBI parameters of a video component (VBI panel):

Figure 5.7: Video parameters (VBI panel)

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 5 5.5 - Operation

423

6. Click on the Helper Channel tab for the encoder to use any helper channel information present or transmit the encoding decisions:

Figure 5.8: Video parameters (Helper Channel panel)

To change audio parameters, the procedure is: 1. Select the component, 2. Click on the Edit Audio parameters... button or double-click on the component, 3. The screen for the parameters of an audio component (General panel) appears:

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

424

Chapter 5 5.5 - Operation

Figure 5.9: Audio parameters (general panel)

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 5 5.5 - Operation

425

4. Click on the Advanced tab to edit the advanced parameters of an audio component (Advanced panel):

Figure 5.10: Audio parameters (advanced panel)

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

426

Chapter 5 5.5 - Operation

5.5.4 - Alarms panel This window lists the current alarms on the devices. The list is refreshed approximately every 5 seconds. The number of alarms features in the tab to the right of the page name. This saves the operator opening the Alarms page to find out the status of the device. When an alarm rises on a device, the application flashes in the Windows task bar to warn the operator who does not work on the application.

Figure 5.11: Alarms panel

The Acknowledge button is used to acknowledge all the alarms in the list. • Acknowledge box is not checked: the LED is flashing in the Alarm panel or in the tasks bar, • Acknowledge box is checked: the LED stops flashing. At each modification in the Alarm list, the button is released.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 5 5.5 - Operation

427

5.5.5 - Scrambling panel To use this panel, the appropriate scrambling option is required.

Figure 5.12: Scrambling panel

The operator can define a list of session words (SW) on the right of the panel and associate each SW with a client name. This list is saved to the hard disk of the PC and recovered each time the application is started up. Session words are limited to six bytes and parity is fixed (even). Three buttons located under the list are used to add, remove or edit a session word. To edit the session word or the service client name, select the corresponding Client Name and Session Word line in the right-hand area and click on Edit or doubleclick on the line. To add the session word or the service client name, select the corresponding Client Name and Session Word line in the right-hand area then click on Add.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

428

Chapter 5 5.5 - Operation

Figure 5.13: Session Word and Client Name

The left-hand area is used to enable or disable scrambling on each encoder and select the session word. The session word is selected from the list using Pick selected SW from list.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 5 5.5 - Operation

429

5.5.6 - Information panel This panel displays the read-only information on the software and hardware options of the encoders.

Figure 5.14: Information panel

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

430

Chapter 5 5.5 - Operation

5.5.7 - Preset panel

Figure 5.15: Preset panel

This panel is used to configure each encoder with the configurations saved in the encoder memory, save configurations and delete backup configurations. Two types of memory are defined for DBE 4110 encoders: • the authorised read and write memories that can be programmed by the Operator using the Fast_DSNG software. • the authorised read-only memories that are programmed at the manufacturers. They contain the standard predefined configurations. The contents of these memories cannot be changed by the Operator. A list is displayed for each encoder in which each line represents a memory identified by a number or letter (1 to 8 for read and write memories; and A, B, and C for read-only memories). Each line also contains the name of the archived configuration and the memory status (Empty, Read only or Used). No name is shown in the second column when a memory is empty. THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 5 5.5 - Operation

431

Three buttons are also available to: • copy the current encoder configuration onto the selected memory (Save button); • activate the configuration from the selected memory (Recall button); • delete the content of the selected memory (Clear button). Note: the value of the parameters recognised by the factory set configurations A, B and C are identical to those described in section 4.5.3.6 - Archived configurations.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

432

Chapter 5 5.5 - Operation

5.5.8 - Dynamic behaviour This section contains the software specification elements that are liable to change.

5.5.8.1 - No connection On starting up the application, the software attempts to set up a control/command link with the main encoder then with the second encoder. As long as all connections (one or two depending on the configuration) are not set up, the configuration parameters are not displayed. As long as communications are not set up, the encoder parameters in the Transmission, Alarms, Scrambling and Information panels are masked.

5.5.8.2 - Setting up a connection As soon as all the connections are set up, the software displays the current configuration. If the encoder does not know how manage the current configuration, it sends a message and proposes another standard configuration. • For a configuration with two encoders, the following tests are carried out: - If the Main encoder does not feature the N41STSIN option, communications are broken and a message is displayed; - If the Main encoder features the N41STSIN option, the TS input configuration is forced to allow all the services through.

• When an external signal is used on the TS input, all the services pass through. Once the tests have been carried out, the encoder configuration is displayed on the software screens. Subsequently, the alarms are regularly requested from the device and displayed in the Alarms panel.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting

433

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting 6.1 - Device connection problems ............................................................ 436 6.2 - Inspecting the power supply fuse .................................................... 437 6.3 - Miscellaneous problems.................................................................... 6.3.1 - Fan life expectancy....................................................................... 6.3.2 - Front panel LCD blank.................................................................. 6.3.3 - Default analogue video input ........................................................ 6.3.4 - Autotest problem........................................................................... 6.3.5 - Recommendations when using the MSU 4440 decoder...............

47232437AK01 June 2003

438 438 438 438 438 439

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

434

Chapter 6

BLANK PAGE

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 6

435

This chapter contains useful information concerning first level maintenance. It is intended to help solve problems related to connection and mains fuse inspection.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

436

Chapter 6 6.1 - Device connection problems

6.1 - DEVICE CONNECTION PROBLEMS

Connection problems are often difficult to solve as causes are numerous and varied. A malfunction may be caused by the network being incorrectly set-up on the PC, a wiring problem or damage to a non-responding device. The aim of this section is to provide a procedure that can be followed to solve these problems in a minimum of time. When the DBE 4110 is signalled as not responding, proceed as follows: 1. Check that the DBE 4110 is operational and that the front panel is working, by moving around the menus. 2. Check that the IP address assigned to the device on the PC in the {Equipment Installation} application matches the one assigned to the device displayed on the front panel in the Other/Tools/IP Address menu. 3. Check that the DBE 4110 responds to network prompts; use the Ping IP address command in an MS-DOS window. If the device responds, skip the next paragraph. 4. Check the value of the subnet mask in the network set-up panel on the PC; the subnet mask identifies the part identifying the subnet in the IP address; like an IP address it consists of 4 numbers separated by "."; if the device address is not in the subnet, the device will not be accessible. 5. Check the cables with the ohmmeter; Ethernet cables are quite fragile and connector crimping may be faulty.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 6 6.2 - Inspecting the power supply fuse

437

6.2 - INSPECTING THE POWER SUPPLY FUSE

If the "POWER" LED on the front panel is off, check the following in the order specified: 1. Check that the ON/OFF switch is ON. 2. Check the mains power supply source. 3. Reset the mains switch to OFF and disconnect the power cord. 4. Open the fuse holder on the switch base.

Fuse holder

5. Measure the fuse value with an ohmmeter. - If a fuse is faulty, contact the NEXTREAM Customer Service. A faulty fuse indicates that the product is damaged. You are therefore not advised to simply change the fuse. Please have the product inspected by a qualified member of NEXTREAM maintenance staff. - If the fuse is not faulty, another fuse in the power supply drawer may be faulty. To inspect this fuse, the unit requires dismounting and hence comes under a higher maintenance level. The procedure is not described in this manual.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

438

Chapter 6 6.3 - Miscellaneous problems

6.3 - MISCELLANEOUS PROBLEMS

6.3.1 - Fan life expectancy The DBE 4110 has built in fans with a life expectancy of roughly 7 years at 30°C (6 years at 40°C). When your DBE 4110 reaches this age, fans will need to be replaced; please, contact NEXTREAM After Sales Service.

6.3.2 - Front panel LCD blank If the DBE 4110 is on and the front panel LCD is backlighted but does not show any indication or shows only four rows of black blocks, check that the contrast is properly set.

6.3.3 - Default analogue video input In the case of a device fitted with a DPSN board, the choice analogue video input PAL/SECAM (50Hz) or NTSC (60 Hz) should be available. If not, check that the DPSN board has been declared present ("Other/Tools/Option/Hardware").

6.3.4 - Autotest problem When a device cannot exit the autotest, try to clear the memory. To do this, switch off and set the rotary switch (on the RSMAINT board, if present, if not, on the SSEB board) to position 5. Switch on, wait 1 minute, switch off, return the rotary switch to position 0, and switch on. However, all the configurations (the current one and those saved) will be lost.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 6 6.3 - Miscellaneous problems

439

6.3.5 - Recommendations when using the MSU 4440 decoder Picture freeze: • A PCR component must be generated. • If "PSI OFF" decoder mode is used, check that the PCR PID is correct (generally the video component PID). • The recommended value of the V_PTS offset is 400 (menu "CHANNEL #1/IRD CONFIG/V_PTS=400"). This value is mandatory as specified in the decoder user manual. Picture chroma incorrect, colours not stable: • The 27 MHz clock generated by the decoder is jittering: its internal PLL is not locked. Check that the PCR PID is correct (PID of another service present in the input multiplex) or verify that the PCR is present.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

440

Chapter 6 6.3 - Miscellaneous problems

BLANK PAGE

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 7 - Customer Service

441

Chapter 7 Customer Service 7.1 - EU Declaration of conformity............................................................ 443 7.2 - FCC Declaration of conformity ......................................................... 444 7.3 - Return your comments ...................................................................... 445 7.4 - NEXTREAM Customer Services........................................................ 446

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

442

Chapter 7

BLANK PAGE

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 7 7.1 - EU Declaration of conformity

443

7.1 - EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

444

Chapter 7 7.2 - FCC Declaration of conformity

7.2 - FCC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 7 7.3 - Return your comments

445

7.3 - RETURN YOUR COMMENTS

All comments help us to improve our publications. Do not hesitate to contact us: NEXTREAM France Département Marketing Service Documentation Rue du Clos-Courtel 35 517 CESSON-SEVIGNE - FRANCE or by e-mail: [email protected]

Please give the manual reference.

Reader name: Company: Address: Phone: Fax: E-mail:

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

446

Chapter 7 7.4 - NEXTREAM Customer Services

7.4 - NEXTREAM CUSTOMER SERVICES

"

For all inquiries regarding the procedure for returning equipment for in-factory repairs and follow-up of repairs: contact the Customer Logistics Service • by telephone:

+ 33 (0)1 34 20 71 82

• by fax:

+ 33 (0)1 34 20 71 92

• by e-mail:

[email protected]

• For all returns, please request an RMA (Return Material Authorisation) number from the Customer Logistics Service. The shipment address (B or C) will be confirmed and will depend on the product. Address B (Brest)

Address C (Cergy)

Nextream France Technopole Brest-Iroise 295 avenue Alexis de Rochon 29280 PLOUZANE FRANCE

Nextream France Service Logistique Clients 17 rue du Petit Albi 95801 CERGY PONTOISE FRANCE

• Equipment should be returned in its original box with its return authorisation form (see following page). If you no longer have the packaging, the faulty device must be protected against shocks during transportation. The Customer Logistics Service examines packaging on arrival and can refuse to carry out repairs if the packaging has been visibly damaged during transportation and this has led to further damage in addition to the fault originally noted. • Unless specifically agreed, cost and risks for return shipment of equipment are borne by the customer. Following repairs, return shipment costs will be borne by Nextream France. • The company may not be held liable for any delay resulting from failure to observe the return procedure.

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 7 7.4 - NEXTREAM Customer Services

447

" For technical inquiries: The technical support service will answer any technical inquiries from customers not covered by a specific support agreement (SLA - Service Level Agreement): • by telephone: + 33 (0)1 34 20 71 72 (from 9am to 6pm, French time, Monday to Friday, excl. business holidays) Answerphone available at all other times. • by fax: + 33 (0)1 34 20 71 92 • by e-mail: [email protected] This period can be extended using an SLA.

" To contact the Customer Services Department: For information on additional services or a support agreement to meet your requirements, please contact your usual sales representative or the Customer Services Department: • by telephone: • by fax: • by e-mail:

+ 33 (0)1 34 20 71 72 + 33 (0)1 34 20 71 92 [email protected]

An offer of services will be made depending on your requirements in terms of: • Service Level Agreements: TOPAZ, RUBY, EMERALD and DIAMOND levels; • In-factory and on-site training; • Spares; • Technical documentation; • Software updates; • Local support; • Specific agreement.

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

448

Chapter 7 7.4 - NEXTREAM Customer Services

This page can be duplicated for the return. Cette page peut être copiée pour faciliter le retour.

RETURN AUTHORISATION FORM AUTORISATION DE RETOUR D'EQUIPEMENT Reference number for the RMA: Numéro d'autorisation de retour: obtained from the Customer Logistic Service + 33 (0)1 34 20 71 82 à obtenir auprès du service logistique clients + 33 (0)1 34 20 71 82 [email protected]

Equipt: Name:

date:

Fault description in the device returned: Merci d'indiquer le défaut de l'équipement:

Ship to (Expédier à): Address B or(ou) Address C : Adresse B (Brest) Nextream France

Adresse C (Cergy) Nextream France

Technopole Brest-Iroise 295 Av Alexis de Rochon 29280 PLOUZANE FRANCE

Service Logistique Clients 17 rue du Petit Albi 95801 Cergy Pontoise FRANCE

Important notices:

Please clearly mark the return authorisation number on the packaging. Except for special agreement, cost and risks for return shipment of the device are borne by the Customer. Nextream France cannot be held responsible if return procedure is not followed.

Remarques importantes : Merci de noter clairement le numéro d'autorisation de retour sur l'emballage. Le transport pour le retour des équipements est à la charge et aux risques du Client. Nextream France ne peut être tenue pour responsable de tout délai suite au nonrespect de la procédure de retour. THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 8 - Abbreviations and Acroynms

449

Chapter 8 Abbreviations and Acroynms Abbreviations and acronyms ................................................................... 451

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

450

Chapter 8

BLANK PAGE

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 8 Abbreviations and acronyms

451

ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS AAL1: ATM Adaptation Layer 1 AAL5: ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AC: Alternating current AC3: Dolby 5+1 Surround encoding A/D: Analogue to Digital ADC: Analogue to Digital Converter AES/EBU: Audio Engineering Society / European Broadcasting Union AMuSE: Audio Multi Standard Encoder API: Application Programming Interface ASI: Asynchronous Serial Interface ASIC: Application Specific Integrated Circuit ATM: Asynchronous Transfer Mode AVA: Audio and Video Acquisition BAT: Bouquet Association Table BCS: Broadcast Control System BIST: Built In Self Test BPSK: Binary Phase Shift Keying B.W.: Bandwidth CAC: Conditional Access Control CAT: Control Access Table CATV: CAble TeleVision CBR: Constant Bit Rate CDV: Compressed Digital Video CLP: Cell Loss Priority CPCS: Common Point Convergence Sublayer CPU: Central Processing Unit CRC: Cyclic Redundancy Check CS: Convergence Sublayer CW: Control Word DBE: Digital Broadcast Encoder dBFS: Full Scale decibel DC: Direct current DDS: Direct Digital Synthesis DES: Data Encryption Standard 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

452

Chapter 8 Abbreviations and acronyms

DID: Data Identifier DPSN: Décodeur Pal Secam Ntsc (Pal Secam Ntsc decoder) DSNG: Digital SNG DSP: Digital Signal Processor DSS: Digital Satellite System DVB: Digital Video Broacasting DVD: Digital Versatile Disc DVITC: Digital Vertical Interval Time Code ECM: Entitlement Control Message EDH: Error Detection and Handling EEC: European Economic Community EIT: Event Information Table EMC: Electromagnetic compatibility EMM: Entitlement Management Message EPG: Electronic Program Guide EPROM: Erasable Program Only Memory ETSI: European Telecommunications Standards Institute FBI: Field Blanking Interval FCP: Field Coding Parameters FDM: Frequency Domain Multiplexing FEC: Forward Error Correction FPGA: Field Programmable Gate Array GOP: Group Of Pictures GFC: Generic Flow Control GND: Ground GPS: Global Positioning System HDTV: High Definition TeleVision HEC: Header Error Control IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers IF: Intermediate Frequency IRD: Integrated Receiver Decoder ISB: Intermediary Satellite Bandwidth ISO/IEC: International Standard Organisation / International Electrical Commission ISOG: International Satellite Operators Group ITU: International Telecommunications Union JTAG: Joint Test Action Group THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 8 Abbreviations and acronyms

453

LBI: Line Blanking Interval LCD: Liquid Crystal Display LED: Light Emitting Diode LTW: Legal Time Window LVDS: Low Voltage Differential Signalling MCPC: Multiple Channel Per Carrier MDT: Multiplex Diagnostic Table MMDS: Microwave Multipoint Distribution System MP@ML: Main Profile / Main Level MPEG: Motion Picture Expert Group MPTS: Multiple Program Transport Stream MSB: Most Significant Bit MTBF: Mean Time Between Failures MUX: multiplexer MXX: multiplexer ASIC / DVB / DSS scrambler NIT: Network Identification Table NTSC: National Television System Community OAM: Operation Administration And Maintenance PAL: Phase Alternative Line PAT: Program Association Table PC: Personal Computer PCMCIA: Personal Computer Memory Card International Association PCR: Program Clock Reference PDH: Pleisiochronous Digital Hierarchy PES: Packetised Elementary Stream PID: Packet Identifier PL: Physical Layer PLE: Physical Layer Electrical PLL: Phase Locked Loop PLO: Physical Layer Optical PMD: Physical Medium Dependent PMT: Program Map Table P/N: Part number PSI: Program Specific Information PSK: Phase Shift Keying PTI: Payload Type Indicator PTS: Presentation Time Stamp 47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

454

Chapter 8 Abbreviations and acronyms

QAM: Quadrature Amplitude Modulation QCIF: Quarter Common Interchange Format QPSK: Quaternary Phase Shift Keying RAM: Random Access Memory R.I.: Revision Index RMS: Root Mean Square RS: Reed Solomon SAM: Scrambling Authorization Module SAR: Segmentation And Reassembly SAV: Start of Active Video SCPC: Single Channel Per Carrier SDH: Synchronous Digital Hierarchy SDI: Serial Digital Interface SDT: Service Description Table SECAM: Sequentiel à Mémoire SFC: Sampling Frequency Converter SI: Service Information SID: Source Identifier SIF: Source Input Format SIS: Sound In Sync SMPTE: Society of Moving Picture and Television Engineers S/N.: Signal / Noise ratio SNG: Satellite News Gathering SNMP: System and Network Management Protocol SPTS: Single Program Transport Stream SRAM: Static Random Access Memory SSEB: Single Service Encoder Board TBC: Time Base Corrector TBD: To be defined TC: Transmission Convergence TCP/IP: Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol TCXO: Temperature Compensated Crystal Oscillator TDT: Time and Date Table TE: 5.08 mm TOT: Time Offset Table TS: Transport Stream TSDT: Transport Stream Description Table THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Chapter 8 Abbreviations and acronyms

455

U: 44.54 mm UNI: User Network Interface UTC: Universal Time Code UTP: Unshielded Twisted Pair VBI: Vertical Blanking Interval VBR: Variable Bit Rate VBV: Video Buffering Verifier VCI: Virtual Channel Identifier VCR: Video Cassette Recorder VITC: Vertical Interval Time Code VPI: Virtual Path Identifier VPS: Video Programming System WSS: Wide Screen Signalling

47232437AK01 June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

456

Chapter 8 Abbreviations and acronyms

BLANK PAGE

THOMSON DBE 4110 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

47232437AK01 June 2003

Nextream - 4110-20

Overview

More details

Related Documents

Nextream - 4110-20